ESPAÑOL
FRANÇAIS
ENGLISH
AV PreTuner
AV7005
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
n
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
FCC INFORMATION (For US customers)
1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
Product Name: AV PreTuner
Model Number: AV7005
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Marantz America, Inc.
(a D & M Holdings Company)
100 Corporate Drive,
Mahwah, NJ, 07430, U.S.A.
Tel. (630) 741-0300
CAUTION
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A
polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained
in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly
approved by Marantz may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use
the product.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating
and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
3. IMPORTANT
When connecting this product to network hub or router, use only shielded
STP or ScTP LAN cables which is available at retailer.
Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
4. NOTE
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
15. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
CAUTION:
To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect the plug
from the wall socket outlet.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit
and must be within easy access by the user.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or
an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
PRECAUTION:
Pour déconnecter complètement ce produit du courant secteur, débranchez
la prise de la prise murale.
La prise secteur est utilisée pour couper complètement l’alimentation de
l’appareil et l’utilisateur doit pouvoir y accéder facilement.
For Canadian customers:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
PRECAUCIÓN:
Para desconectar completamente este producto de la alimentación eléctrica,
desconecte el enchufe del enchufe de la pared.
El enchufe de la alimentación eléctrica se utiliza para interrumpir por completo
el suministro de alimentación eléctrica a la unidad y debe de encontrarse en
un lugar al que el usuario tenga fácil acceso.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
n CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
PRÉCAUTIONS D’INSTALLATION
EMPLAZAMIENTO DE LA INSTALACIÓN
NOTES ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION / NOTAS SOBRE EL USO
n
WARNINGS
AVERTISSEMENTS
ADVERTENCIAS
• Avoid high temperatures.
• Eviter des températures élevées.
• Evite altas temperaturas.
Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when
installed in a rack.
• Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
• Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and
dust.
• Unplug the power cord when not using the unit
for long periods of time.
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.
• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner
come in contact with the unit.
• Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way.
• Ventilation should not be impeded by covering
the ventilation openings with items, such as
newspapers, tablecloths or curtains.
• Naked flame sources such as lighted candles
should not be placed on the unit.
• Observe and follow local regulations regarding
battery disposal.
• Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing
fluids.
• Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, on the unit.
• Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.
• When the switch is in the OFF position, the
equipment is not completely switched off from
MAINS.
• The equipment shall be installed near the
power supply so that the power supply is easily
accessible.
Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur
suffisante lors de l’installation sur une étagère.
• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec
précaution.
Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon.
• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la
poussière.
• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque
l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues
périodes.
• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.
• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans
l’appareil.
• Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du
benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.
• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une
manière ou d’une autre.
• Ne pas recouvrir les orifices de ventilation avec
des objets tels que des journaux, nappes ou
rideaux. Cela entraverait la ventilation.
• Ne jamais placer de flamme nue sur l’appareil,
notamment des bougies allumées.
• Veillez à respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque
vous jetez les piles usagées.
• L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à l’eau ou à
l’humidité.
Permite la suficiente dispersión del calor cuando
está instalado en la consola.
• Maneje el cordón de energía con cuidado.
Sostenga el enchufe cuando desconecte el
cordón de energía.
z
z
z
• Mantenga el equipo libre de humedad, agua y
polvo.
• Desconecte el cordón de energía cuando no
utilice el equipo por mucho tiempo.
• No obstruya los orificios de ventilación.
• No deje objetos extraños dentro del equipo.
• No permita el contacto de insecticidas, gasolina
y diluyentes con el equipo.
z
Wall
Paroi
Pared
• Nunca desarme
ninguna manera.
o
modifique el equipo de
zFor proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined
space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.
• More than 0.3 m (12 in.) is recommended.
• La ventilación no debe quedar obstruida por
haberse cubierto las aperturas con objetos como
periódicos, manteles o cortinas.
• No deberán colocarse sobre el aparato fuentes
inflamables sin protección, como velas
encendidas.
• A la hora de deshacerse de las pilas, respete la
normativa para el cuidado del medio ambiente.
• No exponer el aparato al goteo o salpicaduras
cuando se utilice.
• No colocar sobre el aparato objetos llenos de
líquido, como jarros.
• No maneje el cable de alimentación con las
manos mojadas.
• Cuando el interruptor está en la posición OFF, el
equipo no está completamente desconectado de
la alimentación MAINS.
• El equipo se instalará cerca de la fuente de
alimentación de manera que resulte fácil acceder
a ella.
• Do not place any other equipment on this unit.
zPour permettre la dissipation de chaleur requise, n’installez
pas cette unité dans un espace confiné tel qu’une bibliothèque
ou un endroit similaire.
• Une distance de plus de 0,3 m (12 po) est recommandée.
• Ne placez aucun matériel sur cet appareil.
zPara la dispersión del calor adecuadamente, no instale este
equipo en un lugar confinado tal como una librería o unidad
similar.
• Se recomienda dejar más de 0,3 m (12 pulg.) alrededor.
• No coloque ningún otro equipo sobre la unidad.
• Ne pas poser d’objet contenant du liquide, par
exemple un vase, sur l’appareil.
• Ne pas manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec
les mains mouillées.
• Lorsque l’interrupteur est sur la position OFF,
l’appareil n’est pas complètement déconnecté du
SECTEUR (MAINS).
• L’appareil sera installé près de la source
d’alimentation, de sorte que cette dernière soit
facilement accessible.
II
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Getting started
Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product. To ensure proper operation, please read this user guide carefully before using the product.
After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.
Contents
Advanced version ·······························································47
Information·············································································97
Getting started ··············································································1
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) ·······48
Part names and functions···························································98
Front panel··················································································98
Display························································································99
Rear panel·················································································100
Remote control unit··································································101
Other information ·····································································103
Trademark information······························································103
Surround···················································································104
Relationship between video signals and monitor output··········108
Explanation of terms·································································109
Troubleshooting········································································112
Resetting the microprocessor ··················································115
Specifications ············································································116
Accessories ··················································································2
Install ··························································································48
About this manual·········································································2
Connect ······················································································49
Features························································································2
Set up speakers··········································································52
Cautions on handling ····································································3
Connections (Advanced connection)·········································53
REMOTE CONTROL jacks··························································53
RS-232C connector·····································································54
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks···················································54
Simple version (Simple setup guide) ··························4
Playback (Advanced operation) ·················································55
Basic version··········································································13
Convenient functions··································································55
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) ··························61
Audio output···············································································61
Video output ···············································································62
Playback······················································································62
How to make detailed settings··················································63
Menu map ··················································································63
Examples of menu and front display ··········································64
Inputting characters ···································································65
Input Setup·················································································66
Audio/Video Adjust ·····································································72
Manual Setup··············································································77
Information ·················································································88
Other settings··············································································89
Remote control settings·····························································89
Switches light illumination on/off ···············································89
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit ······90
Operating AV equipment····························································90
Registering preset codes····························································91
Operating components·······························································92
Operating learn function·····························································93
Operating macro function···························································95
Setting the back light··································································96
Connections·················································································14
Important information·································································14
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device ····································15
Connecting a TV··········································································17
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ················································17
Connecting a DVD player····························································18
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)····················18
Connecting a video cassette recorder ········································19
Connecting a digital camcorder ··················································19
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port·····20
Connecting a CD player······························································20
Connecting a CD recorder ··························································21
Connecting a record player·························································21
Connecting an antenna·······························································22
Connecting a wireless receiver (RX101)·····································23
Connect a device that has a multichannel output terminal·········23
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ········································24
Playback (Basic operation) ·························································25
Important information·································································25
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player····································26
Playing a CD player·····································································26
List of preset codes ··································End of this manual
®
Playing an iPod ·········································································27
Playing a USB memory device····················································28
Tuning in radio stations·······························································30
Playing a network audio······························································34
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode) ··························44
Multi-channel playback ·······························································44
Stereo playback ··········································································46
Direct playback ···········································································46
Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby Headphone playback ·····················46
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Accessories
Features
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
Audyssey DSX™
Current feedback amplifier
q User guide...............................................................................1
w Warranty card (for USA) ..........................................................1
e Warranty card (for CANADA)...................................................1
r Power cord..............................................................................1
t Remote control unit (RC011SR) ..............................................1
y R03/AAA batteries...................................................................2
u Setup microphone (ACM1H) ...................................................1
i AM loop antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts)...........................1
o FM indoor antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) ........................1
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX decoder. By connecting
front height speakers to the power amp and using Audyssey DSX
playback, you can experience a more power playback expression
in the height audio range. By connecting front wide speakers, you
can experience a more powerful playback expression in the wide
audio range.
This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifier circuit
for its preamplifier so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and
other equipment that support high-definition audio formats can
be amplified with high fidelity. The high-speed current feedback
amplifier also reproduces a natural sound space.
Supports HDMI 1.4a with 3D, ARC, Deep Color,
Easy to use, Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with an easy to see “Graphical User
Interface” that uses menu displays and levels. The use of level
displays increases operability of the unit.
x.v.Color , Auto Lipsync and HDMI control function
This unit can output 3D video signals input from a Blu-ray Disc
player to a TV that supports a 3D system. This unit also supports
the ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, which reproduces TV
sound with this unit via an HDMI cable used for connecting the
u
r
t
z1
unit and a TV
.
All sources are up-scaled to 1080p
i
o
z1 The TV should support the ARC function.
The unit is provided with an HDMI video up-scaling function that
converts an analog video signal input to the unit to a 1080p (HD
resolution) signal and supplies it to a TV via the HDMI connector.
This enables the unit and a TV connected with a single HDMI cable
and any video source to be reproduced precisely with HD level of
quality.
Internet radio, music and photo streaming via
z2
network
This unit can playback audio files and still images such as
photographs that are stored on your computer via a network. You
can also listen to internet radio and a whole host of other online
About this manual
®
®
Direct play for iPod and iPhone via USB
Music data from an iPod can be played back if you connect the
USB cable supplied with the iPod via the USB port of this unit, and
also an iPod can be controlled with the remote control unit for this
unit.
z3
music
that uses network technology.
nOperation buttons
z2 An internet connection is required.
z3 You may be required to sign a service agreement with the
companies that provide particular services.
The operations described in this guide are based mainly on remote
control operation.
nSymbols
v
This symbol indicates a reference page on which
related information is described.
This symbol indicates a supplementary information
and tips for operations.
This symbol indicates a supplementary information
M-XPort (Marantz-eXtension Port)
6-HDMI inputs and 2-outputs
This unit is equipped with the M-XPort, a Marantz original innovation
that provides outstanding expandability. You can connect the
Wireless Receiver RX101 (sold separately) to this port.
The unit is equipped with 6 HDMI input connectors for connecting
devices with HDMI connectors, such as a Blu-ray Disc player,
game machine, HD video camera, etc.
NOTE
One of the 6 input connectors of this unit is provided on the front
panel so that you can easily connect and display images and videos
recorded in a digital still camera or digital video camera.
and tips for operations.
UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal for front height
channel
This unit is equipped with a dedicated UNBALANCED PRE OUT
terminal on the rear panel. You can enjoy 7.1-channel playback
using the front height channel and 7.1-channel playback using the
surround back channel, without having to reconnect the speakers.
nIllustrations
Note that the illustrations in these instructions are for explanation
purposes and may differ from the actual unit.
High definition audio support
The unit is equipped with a decoder which supports high-quality
digital audio format for Blu-ray Disc players such as Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Features
Cautions on handling
Remote Power Control
• Before turning the power switch on
Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are
no problems with the connection cables.
This unit is equipped with a remote power control function. When
a Marantz Power Amplifier MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 is
connected to this unit, this unit’s power can be switched ON/OFF
together with the MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 power supply.
Connection to the MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 is a ground
floating connection that prevents negative influences on sound
quality as far as possible.
• Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is
set to the standby mode. When going on vacation or leaving home
for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the
power outlet.
• About condensation
If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of
the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on
the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate
properly.
If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power
turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature
before using the unit.
Other features
• Dolby Virtual Speaker (vpage 46)
• Dolby Headphone (vpage 46)
• DTS Neural Surround (vpage 45)
• Cautions on using mobile phones
Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If that
occurs, move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.
• Moving the unit
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units
before moving the unit.
• About Care
• Wipe the cabinet and control panel clean with a soft cloth.
• Follow the instructions when using a chemical cleaner.
• Benzene, paint thinner or other organic solvents as well as
insecticide may cause material changes and discoloration if brought
into contact with the unit, and should therefore not be used.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Simple
version
Simple version (Simple setup guide)
Here, we explain the entire setup procedure, from unboxing the unit to using it in a home theater.
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround
back speakers. For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back
speakers), see page 48.
nBefore connecting the unit, turn off the power to all devices.
nFor operation of the connected devices, refer to the user manuals for each device.
1
2
3
4
5
Install
Connect
Turn on
power
Set up
speakers
Play back
disc
(vpage 5)
(vpage 5)
(vpage 7)
(vpage 8)
(vpage 12)
Enjoy better audio, using Connect 7.1-channel
Use the setup microphone Enjoy Blu-ray Disc and DVD
the correct install method.
speakers, a TV and
Blu-ray Disc player
equipped with an HDMI
connector.
(ACM1H) included with the
product, for automatic
setup.
in surround sound.
®
Set up speakers (Audyssey Auto Setup)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Preparation
Speaker
Detection
Measurement
Calculation
Check
Store
Finish
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
Install
Connect
This unit can perform 2.0/2.1 to 7.1-channel surround playback.
This page provides the speaker installation procedure for the
7.1-channel playback using surround back speakers as an example.
Power amp
• Connect a power amp (sold separately) to the PRE OUT terminal of this unit.
• This unit has an UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal and BALANCED PRE OUT
terminal. Connect to the correct terminal for your power amp.
• Connect the speakers to the power amp.
The default setting is 7.1-channel. You can also perform 5.1-channel playback.
To perform 5.1-channel playback, connect5.1-channel speakers only.
Use Audyssey Auto Setup function of this unit to automatically detect the
number of connected speakers and perform optimal settings for the speakers
to be used.
• For details on speaker connections, see the User Guide for the power amp.
FL
FR
SW
C
22 – 30˚
90 – 110˚
135 – 150˚
SL
SR
Listening
position
SBL
SBR
FL
Front speaker (L)
• Install the surround speakers in a position 2 to
3 ft (60 to 90 cm) higher than ear level.
FR Front speaker (R)
Center speaker
SW Subwoofer
C
Surround
speaker
SL Surround speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R)
SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SBR Surround back speaker (R)
Front
speaker
Surround back
speaker
2 – 3 ft /
• Point slightly
downwards
60 – 90 cm
GViewed from the sideH
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
5
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Connect
nExample of connections to Marantz MM7055 and MM7025
Connecting the balanced PRE OUT terminal
power amp
Connecting the unbalanced PRE OUT terminal
Audio cable
(sold separately)
Audio cable
(sold separately)
GMM7025H
GMM7025H
GMM7055H
GAV7005 XLR connector PIN
GMM7055H
arrangementH
1
2
3
FL
FR
FL
FR
SW
q GND (Ground)
w HOT (Hot)
e COLD (Cold)
C
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
SW
C
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
The PIN arrangement in this device uses
the European method.
In the USA method, w is COLD, and e
is HOT.
When connecting a device that utilizes
the USA type of PIN arrangement, replace
the w and e plugs on one side of the
balanced cable.
SL
SR
SL
SR
Speaker cables
(sold separately)
SBL
SBR
NOTE
Speaker cables
(sold separately)
Do not short the HOT and GND or COLD
and GND for use.
SBL
SBR
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
6
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Connect
1
2
3
4
5
3
Turn on power
Blu-ray Disc player and TV
Turn on the TV and subwoofer
Use only an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable that bears the HDMI
logo (a genuine HDMI product). Using a cable without the HDMI logo (a non-genuine
HDMI product) may result in abnormal playback.
When outputting Deep Color or 1080p, etc., we recommend you use a “High Speed
HDMI cable” or a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”for enhanced high-quality
playback.
1 power.
TV
Power on
Blu-ray Disc player
Change the TV input to the input of
2 this unit.
Press ON to turn on power to the unit.
3 The power indicator switches off, and power
is supplied to the unit.
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
Power on
HDMI cable
HDMI cable
(sold separately)
(sold separately)
Power on
Turn on the power amp power.
To household power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
4
Power cord
(supplied)
NOTE
Before you use the remote control unit for the first
time, be sure to insert the batteries (vpage 102
“Inserting the batteries”).
NOTE
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
1
2
3
4
5
®
Set up speakers (Audyssey Auto Setup)
4
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and
listening room are measured and the optimum settings are
made automatically. This is called “Audyssey Auto Setup”.
To perform measurement, place the setup microphone
in multiple locations all around the listening area. For
best results, we recommend you measure in six or
more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight
About setup microphone placement
Prepare the setup
microphone
1
• Measurements are performed by placing the setup microphone successively
at multiple positions throughout the entire listening area, as shown in
GExample qH. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more
positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions).
• Even if the listening environment is small as shown in GExample wH,
measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in
more effective correction.
Mount the setup microphone on a
tripod or stand and place it in the
main listening position.
When placing the setup microphone, adjust
the height of the sound receptor to the level
of the listener’s ear.
positions).
®
• When performing Audyssey Auto Setup, MultEQ
XT/
GExample qH
GExample wH
®
®
Dynamic EQ /Dynamic Volume functions become active
(vpage 74, 75).
Sound receptor
FL SW
C
FR
Setup
FL SW
C
FR
microphone
• To set up the speakers manually, use “Speaker Setup”
(vpage 78) on the menu.
(
: Measuring positions)
(
: Measuring positions)
NOTE
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows, silence cell phones, televisions, radios, air
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers, or other
devices as measurements may be affected by these sounds.
• Cell phones should be placed away from all audio electronics during the
measurement process as Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may cause
measurement disruptions (even if the cell phone is not in use).
• Do not unplug the setup microphone from the main unit until Audyssey Auto
Setup is completed.
• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles
in the path while the measurements are being made. This will cause inaccurate
SL
SR
SL
SR
M
*
M
*
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
FL Front speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R)
SL Surround speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R)
SBL Surround back speaker (L)
C
Center speaker
NOTE
SW Subwoofer
SBR Surround back speaker (R)
• Do not hold the setup microphone in your hand
during measurements.
• Avoid placing the setup microphone close to a
seat back or wall as sound reflections may give
inaccurate results.
About the main listening position (*M)
readings.
• Loud test sounds may be played during Audyssey
The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or
where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before
starting Audyssey Auto Setup, place the setup microphone in the main listening
Auto setup. This is part of normal operation. If there
is background noise in room, these test signals will
increase in volume.
• Operating VOLUME +, – during the measurements will
cancel the measurements.
®
position. Audyssey MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to
calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for
the subwoofer.
• Measurement cannot be performed when headphones
are connected.
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
8
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
®
Set up speakers (Audyssey Auto Setup)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Set up the subwoofer
2
Preparation
Speaker Detection
If using a subwoofer capable of the
following adjustments, set up the
subwoofer as shown below.
• In STEP 2, you will perform measurements at the
main listening position.
• This step automatically checks the speaker
configuration and speaker size, and calculates the
channel level, distance, and crossover frequency.
It also corrects distortion in the listening area.
NOTE
Connect the setup microphone to the
If “Caution” is displayed:
4SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
n When using a subwoofer with a direct
Go to “Error messages” (vpage 11), check
any related items, and perform the necessary
procedures.
If the problem is resolved, return and restart
“Audyssey Auto Setup”.
mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the
volume adjustment and crossover frequency
setting.
Select “Measure” and then press
n When using a subwoofer without a
6ENTER.
direct mode
When performing Audyssey Auto
Setup over again
When measuring begins, a test tone is
output from each speaker.
Make the following settings:
• Volume : “12 o’clock position”
• Crossover frequency : “Maximum/Highest
Frequency”
When the setup microphone is
connected, the following screen is
displayed.
• Measurement requires several minutes.
Press uito select “Retry”, and then press ENTER.
The detected speakers are displayed.
When measuring has stopped
Press RETURN, to the “Cancel Auto Setup?”
prompt is displayed.
• Low pass filter : “Off”
• Standby mode : “Off”
7
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
AUTO SETUP
NOTE
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
STEP1 Preparation
[1/6]
Press oto select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
Connect the speakers
and place them accord-
ing to the recommenda-
tions in the manual.
Set the following
STEP2 Spkr Detect Check
[2/6]
When you use two subwoofers, please adjust
the subwoofer volume controls individually so
that each subwoofer level is as close as possible
to 75 dB using the test tone (vpage 79) before
Audyssey Auto Setup.
Front
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2spkrs
No
Setting up the speakers again
Repeat the operation from step 4 of
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
S.Back
items if necessary.
Amp Assign
STEP1 Preparation
.
F.Height
F.Wide
Channel Select
No
Auto Setup Start
Retry
Next
Measurement
ENTER Enter
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
Start Auto Setup
RETURN Cancel
Go to Step 3 (Measurement) after speaker check
Set up the remote control
3
This screen provides the method for setting
up 7.1-channel playback using surround back
speakers. For the method of setting up speakers
other than the 7.1-channel system, select “Amp
Assign” and perform step 3 and 4 of “Set up
“Amp Assign”” (vpage 52).
If unused channels are set with “Channel
Select”, measuring time can be shortened. For
setting, perform steps 5 to 9 of “Set up “Channel
Select”” (vpage 52).
unit
NOTE
n Set up the operation mode
Press AMP to set the remote control unit
to amplifier operation mode.
If a connected speaker is not displayed, the
speaker may not be connected correctly. Check
the speaker connection.
Use ui to select “Next 1
8Measurement” and then press ENTER.
Use uito select “Auto Setup Start”
5and then press ENTER.
Press AMP
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
9
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
®
Set up speakers (Audyssey Auto Setup)
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Measurement
Calculation
Check
Store
• In STEP 3, you will perform measurements at
multiple positions (two to eight positions) other
than the main listening position.
• You can achieve a more effective correction of
distortion within the listening area by performing
measurements at multiple positions.
Select “Store” and then press ENTER.
Use uito select the item you want
STEP3
On the
screen, use ui
11
12to check, and then press ENTER.
14Save the measurement results.
to select “Next 1 Calculation”, and
AUTO SETUP
AUTO SETUP
then press ENTER.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
Measuring results are analyzed, and the
frequency response of each speaker in the
listening room is determined.
STEP6 Store
[6/6]
STEP5 Check
[5/6]
Press “Store” to store
calculation results.
Check processing res-
ults. To proceed,press
“Next”
Move the setup microphone to
Spkr Config Check
Distance Check
9position
AUTO SETUP
2, use ui to select
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
Ch. Level Check
Crossover Check
Store
“Measure”, and then press ENTER.
The measurement of the second position
starts. Measurements can be made in up to
eight positions.
STEP4 Calculation
[4/6]
Now calculating...
Please wait.
Next
Store
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
Apply and store measurement result
Select item to check
25%
AUTO SETUP
• Subwoofers may measure a greater reported
distance than the actual distance due to added
electrical delay common in subwoofers.
• If you want to check another item, press
RETURN.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
STEP3 Measurement
[3/6]
Please place the mic-
rophone at ear height
at 2nd listening
position.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
• Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The
time required for this analysis depends on the
number of speakers connected.
The more connected speakers there are, the
longer it takes to perform analysis.
STEP6 Store
[6/6]
Now storing...
Please wait.
Use ui to select “Next 1 Store”
Measure
Next
Calculation
13and then press ENTER.
25%
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
Start next measurement. Test Tone will start
NOTE
• If the result differs from the actual connection
status, or if “Caution!” is displayed, see “Error
messages”(vpage11).ThencarryoutAudyssey
Auto Setup again.
If you want to omit measurements from the next
position onward, select “Next 1Calculation”.
• Saving the results requires about 10 seconds.
• If the measuring results are not to be saved,
STEP4 Calculation
(Go to
)
• If the result still differs from the actual connection
status after remeasurement or the error message
still appears, it is possible that the speakers
are not connected properly. Turn this unit off,
check the speaker connections and repeat the
measurement process from the beginning.
• If you change speaker positions or orientation,
perform Audyssey Auto Setup again to find the
optimal equalizer settings.
press RETURN.
A
message “Cancel Auto
Repeat step 9, measuring positions 3
Setup?” will be displayed. Press o then select
“Yes”. All the measured Audyssey Auto Setup
data will be erased.
10to 8.
When measurement of position
8
is
completed, “Measurements finished.”
a
message is displayed.
NOTE
During saving of measurement results, be sure
not to turn off the power.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
STEP3 Measurement
[3/6]
Measurements finished.
Retry
Next
Calculation
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
Proceed to Step 4 (Analyze)
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
10
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
®
Set up speakers (Audyssey Auto Setup)
Error messages
®
An error message is displayed if Audyssey Auto Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If this happens,
check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again.
Finish
NOTE
Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Unplug the setup microphone from
15the unit’s SETUP MIC jack.
Examples
Error details
Measures
• Connect the included setup microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
• The connected setup microphone is broken, or a
device other than the supplied setup microphone is
connected.
• Not all speakers could be detected.
• The front L speaker was not properly detected.
®
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
Set Dynamic Volume .
MultEQ XT
16
Caution!
No microphone or Speaker
• Check the speaker connections.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
Finish
[6/6]
Storing complete.
Auto Setup is now
finished. Please unplug
microphone.
Retry
RETURN Cancel
Turn on Dynamic Volume?
Check cause of problem!
Yes
No
• There is too much noise in the room for accurate
measurements to be made.
• Either turn off any device generating noise or move
it away.
• Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
• Check the speaker installation and the direction in
which the speakers are facing.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
ENTER Exit
Turn Dynamic Volume on and exit Auto Setup
Caution!
Ambient noise is too high
or Level is too low
• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate
measurements to be made.
• For details of Dynamic Volume settings, see
page 75.
• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
n When turning Dynamic Volume on
Use oto select “Yes“, and then press ENTER.
• The unit automatically enters “Heavy” mode.
Retry
RETURN Cancel
Check cause of problem!
n When turning Dynamic Volume off
Use pto select “No“, and then press ENTER.
• The displayed speaker could not be detected.
• Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
NOTE
Caution!
Front R
None
After performing Audyssey Auto Setup, do not
change the speaker connections or subwoofer
volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey
Auto Setup again.
Retry
RETURN Cancel
Check cause of problem!
• The displayed is connected with the polarities
reversed.
• Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.
• For some speakers, this error message may be
displayed even if the speaker is properly connected.
If you are sure the connection is correct, press ui
to select “Skip”, then press ENTER.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
Caution!
Front L
Phase
Retry
Skip
RETURN Cancel
Check cause of problem!
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
11
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Parameter Check
1
2
3
4
5
5
Play back disc
This function enables you to check the measurement results and
equalizer characteristics after Audyssey Auto Setup.
When power is switched to standby
Press BD two times in a row
Use ui to select “Parameter Check” and then
Press STANDBY.
1 to switch an input source for a
1 press ENTER or p.
player used for playback.
GPower indicator status in standby modeH
• Normal standby : Red
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON” :
Orange
• When “Network Standby” is set to “ON” :
Orange
Use uito select the item you want to check, then
Play the component connected to
2 press ENTER or p.
2 this unit.
Measurement results for each speaker are displayed.
Make the necessary settings on the
player (language setting, subtitles
setting, etc.) beforehand.
AUTO SETUP
PARAMETER CHECK
Speaker Config Check
Distance Check
Channel Level Check
Crossover Check
EQ Check
Adjust the sound volume.
You can also switch the power to standby by
pressing ON/STANDBY on the main unit.
3
VOLUME + ..................................... Volume up
VOLUME – ................................ Volume down
MUTE.................................................. Muting
Restore
Show speaker configuration result
Set the listening mode.
Set the listening mode according to the playback contents
(cinema, music, etc.) or according to your liking (vpage 44
“Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)”).
4
Check the speaker configuration.
Speaker Config. Check
NOTE
Check the distance.
Distance Check
During power standby, a minimal amount of power is consumed. To
totally cut off the power, remove the power cord from the power
outlet.
Check the channel level.
Channel Level Check
Check the crossover frequency.
Crossover Check
Check the equalizer.
EQ Check
• If “EQ Check” is selected in step 2, press uito select equalizing
curve (“Audyssey” or “Audyssey Flat”) to be checked.
Use opto switch the display between the different speakers.
Press RETURN.
3 The confirmation screen reappears. Repeat steps 2.
Retrieving Audyssey Auto Setup settings
If you set “Restore” to “Yes”, you can return to Audyssey Auto Setup
®
measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ XT)
even when you have changed each setting manually.
Remote control operation
Move the cursor
12
Confirm the setting
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Return to previous menu
buttons
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Basic
version
Basic version
Here, we explain the connections and basic operation methods for this unit.
FConnections vpage 14
FPlayback (Basic operation) vpage 25
FSelecting a listening mode (Surround mode) vpage 44
nRefer to the pages indicated below for information on connecting and playing back the various
media and external devices.
Audio and Video
Connection
Playback
TV
vpage 16, 17
vpage 16, 17
vpage 16, 18
vpage 16, 19
vpage 16, 18
vpage 16
–
Blu-ray Disc player
vpage 26
DVD player
vpage 26
Video cassette recorder
Set-top box (Satellite tuner or cable TV)
Game console
–
–
–
–
Digital camcorder
vpage 19
Audio
Connection
Playback
®
iPod
vpage 20
vpage 20
vpage 20
vpage 21
vpage 21
vpage 22
vpage 22
vpage 23
vpage 27
USB memory device
CD player
vpage 28
vpage 26
CD recorder
–
Record player
–
SIRIUS satellite radio
HD Radio receiver
Wireless receiver (RX101)
vpage 30
vpage 32
–
Network
Network
Connection
Playback
vpage 24
vpage 34
For speaker connections, see page 5.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Connections
Important information
• Make connections as follows before using this unit. Select an appropriate connection type
according to the components to be connected.
GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H
This unit
• You may need to make some settings on this unit depending on the connection method. Refer to
each description for more information.
Monitor
Video device
• Select the cables (sold separately) according to the components being connected.
NOTE
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
(IN)
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components being
connected.
Output
Input
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors (OUT2/ZONE2)
Component video
connectors
Converting input video signals for output
(Video conversion function)
Video connector
Video connector
Video connector
Video connector
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, Component video and video) and
three types of video output connectors (HDMI, Component video and video).
Use the connectors corresponding to the components to be connected.
This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to this unit into the formats used
to output the video signals from this unit to a monitor.
in Set as Necessary
• Set when not using the video conversion function.
“Video Convert” (vpage 70)
• Set when changing the resolution of the video signal.
“Resolution” (vpage 70)
GFlow of video signals for MAIN ZONEH
This unit
Monitor
• The video conversion function supports the NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC 4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60
formats.
Video device
• The resolution of the video signal input to this unit’s HDMI connector is the one set at “Resolution”
(vpage 70). (1080p HDMI signals and 1080p component signals are output at 1080p, regardless of the
setting.)
• Resolutions of HDMI-compatible TVs can be checked at “HDMI Monitor 1 Information” or “HDMI
Monitor 2 Information” (vpage 88).
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
(IN)
Output
Input
NOTE
HDMI connector
HDMI connector
HDMI connector
HDMI connector
• HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video
conversion function might not operate.
• Component video input signals cannot be converted into Video format.
• A menu is output via the HDMI connector or component video connector.
• When using component output terminal 2 for ZONE2 video signal output, set “Input Setup” – “Input
Assign” – “Component” (vpage 69) in the menu to “ZONE2”.
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Video connector
Video connector
Video connector
Video connector
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
About HDMI cables
Important information
• When a device supporting Deep Color signal transfer is connected, use a cable compatible “High Speed
HDMI cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
• When the ARC function is used, connect a device with a ”Standard HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High
Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” for HDMI 1.4a.
Examples of screen display
• Menu screen
• Status display screen
When the input source is
switched
When the volume is adjusted
HDMI control function (vpage 55)
MENU
This function allows you to operate external devices from this unit and operate this unit from external
devices.
Audio/Video Adjust
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup
NOTE
• The HDMI control function may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its settings.
• You cannot operate a TV or Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player that is not compatible with the HDMI control
function.
Master Volume -80.0dB
BD
Input
Mode STEREO
Auto
Adjust various audio and video parameters
Status display: The operating status appears briefly on the screen
when the input source is switched or the volume is
changed.
About 3D function
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of the HDMI 1.4a standards.
For playing the 3D video content, a player, and a TV that support the 3D function of the HDMI 1.4a
standards are required in addition to this unit.
NOTE
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu
screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
NOTE
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu
screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function
You can connect up to six HDMI-compatible devices to the unit.
The Audio Return Channel in HDMI 1.4a enables a TV, via a single HDMI cable, to send audio data “upstream”
to this unit.
HDMI function
This unit supports the following HDMI functions:
NOTE
• 3D
• To enable the ARC function, set “HDMI Control” to “ON” (vpage 80).
• Deep Color (vpage 109)
• ARC function is only supported for the HDMI OUT 1 connector. In order to use the ARC function, connect
the television to the HDMI OUT 1 connector.
• When connecting a TV that does not support the ARC function, a separate connection using an audio
cable is required. In this case, refer to “Connecting a TV” (vpage 17) for the connection method.
• Auto Lip Sync (vpage 80, 109)
• x.v.Color, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color (vpage 109, 111)
• High definition digital audio format
• ARC (Audio Return Channel)
About Content Type
• Content Type
• CEC (HDMI control)
The HDMI specification version 1.4a enables simple, automated picture setting selection with no user
intervention.
Copyright protection system
NOTE
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD-Video or DVD-Video via HDMI connection, both
this unit and TV or the player need to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of
data encryption and authentication of the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP.
• If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read
the user guide of your television or player for more information.
To enable the Content Type, set “Video Mode” to “Auto” (vpage 70).
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
Cables used for connections
Audio and video cable (sold separately)
• When this unit is connected to other devices with HDMI cables, connect this unit and TV also with an
HDMI cable.
• When connecting a device that supports Deep Color transmission, please use a “High Speed HDMI
cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
• Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case,
switch the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
• When this unit and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with
HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.
HDMI cable
• This interface allows transfer of digital video signals and digital audio signals over a single HDMI cable.
Blu-ray
Disc
player
Video
cassette
recorder
DVD
player
Set-top
box
Game
console
TV 1
TV 2
NOTE
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
HDMI
IN
• The HDMI signal is not simultaneously output to HDMI 1 and HDMI 2. Select
the connector that you want to use in advance using “Monitor Out” (vpage 80)
in the menu, or by pressing the HDMI button on the remote control unit or the
HDMI OUT button on the main unit.
• HDMI control function is only supported for the HDMI OUT 1 connector. In order
to use the HDMI control function, connect the television to the HDMI OUT 1
connector.
• The audio signal from the HDMI output connector (sampling frequency, number
of channels, etc.) may be limited by the HDMI audio specifications of the
connected device regarding permissible inputs.
• The front panel HDMI input connector is displayed as “HDMI6” in the “Input
Setup” – “Input Assign” (vpage 68) in the menu.
Connecting to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector
When an HDMI/DVI conversion cable (sold separately) is used, the HDMI video signals are converted to
DVI signals, allowing connection to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector.
GRear panelH
NOTE
Digital
• No sound is output when connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector. Make separate audio
connections.
camcorder
• Signals cannot be output to DVI-D devices that do not support HDCP.
• Depending on the combination of devices, the video signals may not be output.
HDMI
OUT
nSettings related to HDMI connections
Set as necessary. For details, see the respective reference pages.
Input Assign (vpage 68)
Set this to change the HDMI input connector to which the input source is assigned.
HDMI Setup (vpage 80)
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
• RGB Range
• HDMI Control
• Auto Lip Sync
• Standby Source
• HDMI Audio Out
• Power Off Control
• Monitor Out
GFront panelH
NOTE
The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Connecting a TV
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• You can enjoy video and audio from a Blu-ray Disc.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For video connections, see “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”
(vpage 14).
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
To listen to TV audio through this device, use the optical digital connection.
(Yellow)
Video cable
NOTE
Y
Y
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
This connection is not required when a TV compatible with the ARC function (Audio Return Channel (HDMI
1.4a standard function) is connected to this unit via an HDMI connection.
For details, see “About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function” (vpage 15) or refer to the instruction
manual for your TV.
Component
video cable
PB
PR
PB
PR
Audio cables (sold separately)
L
L
(White)
Cables used for connections
Audio cable
(Red)
R
R
Video cable (sold separately)
(Yellow)
Video cable
Blu-ray Disc player
Y
Y
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
VIDEO
AUDIO
Component video
cable
PB
PR
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
L
R
Y
PB PR
Audio cable (sold separately)
Optical cable
L
R
TV
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
VIDEO
IN
OPTICAL
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
Y
PB PR
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
For HD audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus and DTS Express) playback, connect with HDMI
(vpage 15 “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device”).
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Connecting a DVD player
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
• You can enjoy video and audio from a DVD.
• You can watch satellite or cable TV.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).
Cables used for connections
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (sold separately)
(Yellow)
(Yellow)
Video cable
Video cable
Y
Y
Y
Y
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Component
video cable
Component
video cable
PB
PR
PB
PR
PB
PR
PB
PR
Audio cables (sold separately)
Audio cables (sold separately)
L
L
L
L
(White)
(White)
Audio cable
Audio cable
(Red)
R
R
(Red)
R
R
Coaxial
digital cable
Coaxial
digital cable
(Black)
(Black)
DVD player
Satellite tuner/Cable TV
AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COAXIAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
COAXIAL
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB PR
L
R
L
R
Y
PB PR
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Connecting a video cassette recorder
Connecting a digital camcorder
• You can record video onto a video cassette tape.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-
compatible device” (vpage 15).
• You can enjoy video and audio from a digital camcorder.
• You can enjoy games by connecting a game machine via the AUX1
input connector. In this case, select the input source to “AUX1”.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-
compatible device” (vpage 15).
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video
input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
Cables used for connections
NOTE
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
To record video signals through this unit, use the same type of video
cable for connection between this unit and the player as used for
connection between this unit and the recorder.
Video cable (sold separately)
(Yellow)
Video cable
(Yellow)
Video cable
Y
Y
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Audio cable (sold separately)
Component
video cable
PB
PR
PB
PR
L
L
(White)
Audio cable
(Red)
R
R
Audio cable (sold separately)
Optical cable
L
L
(White)
Audio cable
(Red)
R
R
Digital camcorder
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
Video cassette recorder
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
IN
Y
PB PR
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
R
L
R
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
The front panel OPTICAL input terminal is displayed as “OPT3” in the
“Input Setup” – “Input Assign” setting (vpage 68) in the menu.
NOTE
When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other
source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In
this case, use the monitor output of the same connector as the input.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
Connecting a CD player
You can enjoy music stored on an iPod or USB memory device.
• You can enjoy CD sound.
Supported iPod models
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
Cables used for connections
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
Made for
Cables used for connections
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
Audio cable (sold separately)
L
L
• iPod with video
(White)
Audio cable
USB
iPod
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone
(Red)
R
R
memory
device
Optical cable
CD player
or
AUDIO
AUDIO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone 3GS
L
R
L
L
R
R
Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate
or receive power. When using a portable USB connection type HDD
of the kind to which an AC adapter can be connected to supply power,
use the AC adapter.
NOTE
• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory
device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Connecting a CD recorder
Connecting a record player
• You can record audio on a CD or cassette tape.
You can enjoy playing records.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Cables used for connections
L
L
(White)
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
(Red)
R
R
L
L
(White)
(Red)
Audio cable
R
R
Turntable (MM cartridge)
Optical cable
CD recorder
AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
IN
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
GND
OUT
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
R
L
R
• This unit is compatible with record players with an MM cartridge. When you connect to a record player
with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
• When you increase the volume without connecting the record player, there may be “booming” noise
from the speakers.
NOTE
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
The SIGNAL GND terminal of this unit is not a safety ground connection. Connect it to reduce noise when
noise is excessive. Note that depending on the record player, connecting the ground line may have the
reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.
To perform digital recording using the digital connector (OPT OUT), assign either one of the digital input
connectors to “CDR” by selecting “Input Setup” – “Input Assign” setting (vpage 68).
The above figure shows an example of changing the assignment of OPT1 connector to “CDR”.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Connecting an antenna
NOTE
Connecting an HD Radio receiver
• By connecting a HD Radio antenna to this unit, you can receive
HD Radio programs.
Connecting a SIRIUS connector
Keep the power cord unplugged until the SiriusConnect HomeTuner
connection have been completed.
®
• This unit is a SIRIUS Satellite Radio Ready receiver. You can
®
receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio by connecting to the SiriusConnect
• HD Radio broadcasting currentry is available in the United States and
select other countries.
Home Tuner and subscribing to the SIRIUS service.
• Plug the SIRIUS connector on the SIRIUS service.
• Position the Home Tuner antenna near a south-facing window to
receive the best signal.
For details, see “Listening to SIRIUS satellite radio” (vpage 30).
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions
of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner.
nPositioning the antenna
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be positioned
correctly. Use the following map to determine which area you are
in and position the antenna accordingly.
AM loop antenna
(for HD Radio broadcasting,
supplied)
Direction of broadcasting station
• To prevent interference, install
at least 3.3 ft/1 m away from the
antenna connected to the this
unit’s other AM tuner terminal.
FM outdoor
antenna
SKY
SiriusConnect Home Tuner
NORTH
75 Ω coaxial
cable
q
w
e
q
t
r
WEST
EAST
FM indoor
antenna (for
HD Radio
e
w
broadcasting,
supplied)
HORIZON
SOUTH
White
Black
Area 1 Point the antenna toward the sky in the east, northeast, or
southeast, either through a window or outside.
When
connecting
digital audio
Area 2 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northeast,
either through a window or outside.
Area 3 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northwest,
either through a window or outside.
Area 4 Point the antenna toward the sky in the west, northwest, or
southwest, either through a window or outside.
Area 5 Put the antenna outside and point it straight up. The antenna
cannot be used indoors.
AM outdoor
antenna
Ground
in Set as Necessary
When connecting digital of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner,
perform the setting “Digital”.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Connecting an antenna
Connecting a wireless receiver
(RX101)
Connect a device that has a
multichannel output terminal
nAM loop antenna assembly
Put the stand section
Stand
By connecting a wireless receiver RX101 (sold separately) to this unit,
you can receive and playback audio signals from other devices using
the Bluetooth Communication Function.
• You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multi-
channel sound audio output jacks to enjoy music and video.
1 through the bottom of the
Square
hole
loop antenna from the
rear and bend it forward.
• The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc
player / DVD player (vpage 17 “Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player”).
• Use a Bluetooth device that is A2DP compatible (vpage 109
“A2DP”).
Loop
antenna
Projecting
part
• You can also use wireless receiver RX101 as an external IR receiver. Cables used for connections
Insert the projecting part
• For instructions on the wireless receiver settings, refer to the
2 into the square hole in
Audio cable (sold separately)
RX101’s operating instructions.
Wireless receiver RX101
the stand.
L
L
(White)
(Red)
Audio cable
Audio cable
R
R
Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player /
External decoder
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
nUsing the AM loop antenna
L
R
L
R
L
R
Suspending on a wall
Suspenddirectlyonawallwithoutassembling.
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
Nail, tack, etc.
Bluetooth device
(A2DP Compatibility)
Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to assemble.
R
L
R
L
R
NOTE
• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM
loop antenna.
Remote control unit
• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal
parts of the panel.
• If the signal has noise interference, connect the ground terminal You can enjoy listening to music by connecting a wireless receiver
via the M-XPort input connector. In this case, set the input source to
“M-XPort”.
(GND) to reduce noise.
• If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend
installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store
where you purchased the unit.
in Set as Necessary
To play analog signals input from 7.1CH INPUT terminals, set
“Input Mode” (vpage 71) to “7.1CH IN”.
“7.1CH IN” can also be selected with A/D on the remote control
unit.
NOTE
To use wireless receiver RX101 as external IR receiver, set the
remote sensor function of this unit to “Remote Lock:ON” (vpage 89
“Remote control settings”).
When a device is connected to the SBL/SBR terminal of 7.1CH INPUT
terminals, set “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) to “Normal”.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
• This unit lets you play via your home network (LAN) music files
stored on a computer and music content such as that from Internet
radio.
NOTE
Required system
• A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet.
No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband
connection to the Internet.
• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an
ISP or a computer shop for details.
• Marantz assumes no responsibility whatsoever for any
communication errors or troubles resulting from customer’s network
environment or connected devices.
• This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible router
is required if you have a contract for a type of line set by PPPoE.
• Do not connect an NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port/
Ethernet connector on your computer.
nBroadband internet connection
You can also operate this unit from a computer using the Web
control function.
• You can update by downloading the latest firmware from the
Marantz website.
For more information, on the menu, select “Firmware Update”
(vpage 86).
• See“NetworkSetup”onthemenu(vpage81)formoreinformation
on network setting.
nModem
Device that connects to the broadband circuit and conducts
communications on the Internet.
A type that is integrated with a router is also available.
nRouter
When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped
with the following functions:
Cables used for connections
• Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
• Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching
hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
Cable (sold separately)
Ethernet
cable
Computer
Modem
nEthernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
• Use only shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable which is available at
retailer.
• Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.
We recommend using a normal type cable.
Internet
To WAN side
Router
• If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network
settings are made manually, make the settings at “Network Setup”
(vpage 81).
To LAN port
LAN port/
Ethernet
• With this unit, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions
to make the network settings automatically.
To LAN port
connector
• When using this unit with the broadband router’s DHCP function
enabled, this unit automatically performs the IP address setting and
other settings.
When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP
function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at “Network
Setup” (vpage 81).
• When setting manually, check the setting contents with the network
administrator.
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or a computer shop.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playback (Basic operation)
n Selecting the input source (vpage 25)
n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 26)
n Turning off the sound temporarily (vpage 26)
• Select input source “PHONO” to play back music from a record • When using with an iPod connected directly to the USB port of this
player connected to the PHONO input connector.
• Select the input source “PHONO” using one of the following
methods.
q “Source select ” menu (“Using the “Source Select” menu”
provided on the right)
unit, select “
(NET/USB)” for the input source.
• Input sources that are not going to be used can be set ahead of time.
Make this setting at “Source Delete” (vpage 84).
• To turn off the source selection menu without selecting an input
source, press SOURCE SEL again.
n Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player
(vpage 26)
w INPUT df on the remote control unit (“Operating the remote
control unit” provided on the right)
n Playing a CD player (vpage 26)
nUsing the button on the remote control unit
e INPUT SELECTOR knob on the main unit (“Operating the main
unit” provided on the right)
• Select input source “SIRIUS” with SATR button.
®
Press INPUT df.
n Playing an iPod (vpage 27)
• When INPUT df is pressed, the input
source is switched in the order shown
below.
n Playing a USB memory device (vpage 28)
n Tuning in radio stations (vpage 30)
n Playing a network audio (vpage 34)
nUsing the “Source Select” menu
q Press AMP and the press SOURCE SEL.
Display the “Source Select” menu.
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
CDR
NET/USB
CD TV
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
(vpage 44)
The currently selected input
source is highlighted.
M-XPort
HD Radio
SIRIUS
PHONO
Source Select :Flickr
Recent Source
q
Select
Playback (Advanced operation) (vpage 55)
nUsing the knob on the main unit
w
Turn INPUT SELECTOR.
ENTER Enter
• Turning INPUT SELECTOR switches
the input source, as shown below.
Important information
e
Before starting playback, make the connections between the different
components and the settings on this unit.
NOTE
Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected components
when playing them.
q Input Source
The name of the highlighted input source is displayed.
w Recently used sources
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
CDR
NET/USB
CD TV
M-XPort
HD Radio
SIRIUS
PHONO
The recently used input sources (up to five) are displayed.
e Icons for the input sources in the different categories are
displayed.
Selecting the input source
Press the input source select button
(BD, DVD, VCR, SAT, GAME, AUX1,
NET/USB, TV, CD, CDR, SATR, TUNE,
M-XP) twice to play back that source.
The desired input source can be selected
directly.
w Use uiopto select the input source,
then press ENTER.
The input source is set and the source
selection menu is turned off.
You can also use the following operation to select an input
source.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Important information
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD
player
Adjusting the master volume
Use VOLUME to adjust the volume.
Set the front speakers to be used
Press SPKR A/B.
• Each time you press SPKR A/B, the front
speaker setting will change as follows.
The following describes the procedure for playing Blu-ray Disc player/
DVD player.
n When the “Volume Display” setting
(vpage 84) is “Relative”
GAdjustable rangeH
Prepare for playback.
Front A
Front B
Front A+B
q Turn on the power of the TV,
1
subwoofer and player.
w Change the TV input to the input of
this unit.
– – –
–80.5dB – 18.0dB
n When the “Volume Display” setting (vpage 84) is
e Load the disc in the player.
“Absolute”
GAdjustable rangeH
0.0 – 99.0
Press ON to turn on power to the
2 unit.
• The adjustable range may vary depending on input signal and
channel level settings.
Press BD or DVD twice to switch
3 the input source for the player
used for playback.
You can also operate via the main unit.
In this case, perform the following
operations.
Play the component connected to this unit.
Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting,
4
Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume.
subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand.
Playing a CD player
Turning off the sound temporarily
The following describes the procedure for playing CD player.
Press MUTE.
Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the subwoofer
1
and player.
w Load the disc in the player.
Press ON to turn on power to the
2 unit.
• The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage 84).
• To cancel, press MUTE again. Muting can also be canceled by
adjusting the master volume.
Press CD twice to switch the input
3 source to the CD player.
Play the component connected to
4 this unit.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
®
Playing an iPod
You can play back both video, photo and audio.
Press SEARCH/INFO and hold it down for 2 seconds
®
Connect the iPod to the USB
5 or more to select the display mode.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uiop
to return to the original screen.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction,werecommendplaybackinM-DAXmode(vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• In Remote mode, press STATUS during
playback to check the title name, artist
name, and album name.
1 port (vpage 20 “Connecting an
• There are two modes for displaying the contents recorded on the
iPod.
iPod or USB memory device to
the USB port”).
Remote mode
Display iPod information on the TV screen.
• The unit display shows single-byte
alphanumeric characters and some
symbols only. “.” is displayed in place
of incompatible characters.
Press ON to turn on power to the
2 unit.
Press NET/USB twice to switch
3 the input source to “NET/USB”.
• In ”Remote mode”, the iPod display is
as shown at right.
OK to disconnect.
[1/8]
NOTE
Direct mode
Display iPod information on the iPod screen.
Favorite
• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some
functions may not operate.
• Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in
conjunction with the iPod.
• “Direct iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
Internet Radio
Media Server
iPod
Flickr
Napster
Pandora
Display mode
Music file
Remote mode
Direct mode
P
P
Playable
files
Video file
z
Remote
control unit
(This unit)
P
P
P
Active
buttons
Use ui to select “iPod”, then
4 press ENTER or p.
®
iPod
[1/8]
iPod
zOnly the sound is played.
Playlists
Use uito select the item, then press ENTER or p
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
6 to select the file to be played.
7
Press ENTER, por 1.
Playback starts.
SEARCH
Search
NOTE
If the connections screen is not displayed, the iPod may not be
properly connected. Reconnect it.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
®
Playing an iPod
Playing a USB memory device
niPod operation
Playing back music or still picture (JPEG) files recorded on a USB
memory device.
GCompatible formatsH
USB memory devices
Operation buttons
Function
z1
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui) /
Manual search (Press and hold, ui)
z2
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
WAV
P
P
P
P
P
P
Important information
uiop
nUSB memory devices
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
Stop
z3
MPEG-4 AAC
A USB memory device can be connected to the USB port of this
unit to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the USB
memory device.
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
JPEG
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Also, files stored on an iPod can be played when the iPod is
connected directly to the USB port of this unit. See “Connecting
an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port” (vpage 20).
• Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on this
unit.
SEARCH
(Press and release)
z1
z2
z1 USB
Page search
/ Character search
• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using
MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
• WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
SEARCH
(Press and hold)
Remote / Direct mode switching
Return
RETURN
6 7
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or
“FAT32” format.
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
• FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16/24 bits.
z2 Copyright-protected files can be played on certain portable
players compatible with MTP.
z3 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on
this unit.
(Press and hold)
1
8 9
3
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Stop
Repeat playback
Random playback
Album art function
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be
displayed while playing the file.
2
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright
protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from
a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending
on the computer’s settings.
REPEAT
RANDOM
Slide show function
Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be played
as slide shows.
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV POWER
TV INPUT
The duration each picture is displayed can be set.
GCompatible formatsH
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Sampling
frequency
Bit rate
Extension
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they
are stored in the folder.
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or
p(next page).
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select
the first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps
32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps
.wma
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
.mp3
.wav
WAV
32/44.1/48 kHz
–
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO.
32/44.1/48/
–
.flac
88.2/96 kHz
• Repeat playback and shuffle playback can also
be set from “Input Setup” – “Playback Mode”
(vpage 71) in the menu.
• If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be
able to perform a character search.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playing a USB memory device
nUSB operation
Playing files stored on USB memory
devices
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uiop
to return to the original screen.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction,werecommendplaybackinM-DAXmode(vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the
top partition can be selected.
• This unit is compatible with MP3 files conforming to “MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3” standards.
Operation buttons
PRESET +, –
Function
Preset channel selection
Connect the USB memory device
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
uiop
1 to the USB port (vpage 20
“Connecting an iPod or USB
memory device to the USB port”).
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
Stop
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Press NET/USB twice to switch
2 the input source to “NET/USB”.
z1
z2
SEARCH
RETURN
1
Page search
/ Character search
Return
[1/8]
NOTE
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Pause
• Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on a USB memory device when using
this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.
• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will
operate or be supplied power. When using a USB portable hard disk
that can draw power from an AC adapter, we recommend using the
AC adapter.
favorite
8 9
3
Internet Radio
Media Server
USB
Flickr
Napster
Pandora
2
Stop
1 – 8
Preset channel selection
SHIFT
REPEAT
RANDOM
Preset channel block selection
Repeat playback
• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the USB port of
this unit using a USB cable.
Random playback
Press uito select “USB”, then press ENTER or p.
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
3
TV POWER
TV INPUT
[1/7]
USB
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
D&M1
D&M2
D&M3
Music1.mp4
Music2.mp3
Music3.m4a
Music4.m4a
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or
p(next page).
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select
the first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
• Selecting
“USB”.
in the “Source Select” menu, lets you directly select
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO.
Press ui to select the search item or folder, then
4 press ENTER or p.
• Repeat playback and shuffle playback can also
be set from “Input Setup” – “Playback Mode”
(vpage 71) in the menu.
• If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be
able to perform a character search.
Press uito select the file, then press ENTER, por
5 1.
Playback starts.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Tuning in radio stations
Important information
nSIRIUS XM radio legal
Listening to SIRIUS satellite radio
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the
property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and
XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation
fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each
sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite
radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is
prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer,
hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or
software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or
XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and
Hawaii.
Press SATR twice to switch the
nAbout SIRIUS XM radio
1 input source to “SIRIUS”.
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS
or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your satellite-ready
receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Use TUNING + or TUNING – to
2 select the channel.
When the channel is tuned in, the name
of the song and artist are displayed.
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from
categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz,
Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional
and college sports including play by play games from select
leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports
talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming,
local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.
• The channel switches continuously when TUNING + or TUNING – is
pressed and held.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “TUNER” (vpage 85). Press uiopto
return to the original screen.
• The song title, artist name, composer
nUsing the HD Radio™ receiver
HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional
FM/ AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and
select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.
HD Radio Technology provides higher quality sound than
conventional broadcasts and allows reception of data services.
• FM sounds as sensational as CDs
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to
activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow
installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite
tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a variety of
programming packages available, including the option of adding
“The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best
of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy
the most popular programming among both services. The “Best
of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers
at this time.
name, category and reception level can
be checked by pressing STATUS.
• AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo
• A variety of “data services”, including text-based information,
song title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received.
Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with
HD Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8
multicast programs.
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels
featuring content that may be inappropriate for children.
For detailed information on HD Radio Technology, please go to
“www. hdradio.com”.
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com
or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers
should visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR
(1-877-438- 9677).
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can
call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or
siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Tuning in radio stations
nPresetting radio channels (Preset memory)
nChecking the SIRIUS signal strength and radio
Your favorite broadcast channels can be preset so that you can
tune them in easily. Up to 56 channels can be preset.
You can also operate via the main unit. In this
case, perform the following operations.
ID
Press opto select the preset radio channel.
Press STATUS until
Tune in the broadcast channel
1 “SIGNAL” appears on the
1 you want to preset.
display.
Press MEMORY.
The display will switch as
shown below, depending on the
reception conditions.
2
nSearching categories
Press SHIFT to select the block
Display
EXCELLENT
GOOD
WEAK
NO SIGNAL
Status
Signal strength is excellent
Signal strength is good
Signal strength is weak
No signal
3 (A to G) in which to preset the
Press op.
channel (1 to 8 per block), then
press PRESET +, PRESET – or 1 –
8 to select the preset number.
1
SR001 Hits 1
CAT : Pops
Channel category
Press MEMORY again to complete
Adjust the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL:
4 the setting.
Use opto select the category, to use uito select
2 EXCELLENT” is shown on the display.
2 the desired channel.
• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to
4.
Press STATUS until the channel (example: “SR001”)
3 is displayed.
NOTE
nAccessing SIRIUS satellite radio channels
Press TUNING + or TUNING –
Preset channels are erased by overwriting them.
directly
4 and select channel 0 (SR000).
Channel No. and Sirius ID are alternately
shown on the display.
Press SEARCH/INFO.
nListening to preset channels
1
Press PRESET +, PRESET – to select
the desired preset channel, then press
ENTER.
Press 0 – 9 to input the channel.
2 Example: Accessing channel “SR123”:
Press 1, 2 and 3.
SR000 SiriusID
************
Sirius ID
• Write your own SIRIUS ID for storage use.
Sirius ID :
• If no button is pressed within several
• Preset channels can also be selected by
pressing SHIFT/TOP MENU (Block) and 1 –
8 (Channel).
seconds,
the
channel
automatically
switches to the one whose number has
been input.
The strength of both the SIRIUS satellite and terrestrial signals can be
checked “Antenna Aiming” (vpage 68).
Press ENTER to set that channel.
3 Reception switches to the selected
channel.
• “UPDATING” is displayed while the encording code is being
updated.
• “SIRIUS UPDATING” is displayed when updating SIRIUS tuner
firmware.
• Refer to “Troubleshooting” – “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (vpage 113)
regarding other messages.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Tuning in radio stations
nSIRIUS operation
nParental Lock
Listening to HD Radio stations
Operation buttons
PRESET +, –
uiop
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation / Category search
Press TUNE twice to switch the
Tune to the channel you want to
1 lock.
1 input source to “HD Radio”.
Press BAND to select “FM” or
Press ENTER for at least 3
ENTER
(Press and hold)
To parental lock password check screen
2 “AM”.
2 seconds.
“Enter Lock Code” is displayed.
SEARCH
RETURN
TUNING +, –
Direct search
Return
Channel selection
FM When listening to an FM broadcast.
Enter the 4-digit lock code using
AM When listening to an AM broadcast.
3 uiopor 0 – 9.
Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /
Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)
Tune in the desired broadcast
station.
q To tune in automatically (Auto tuning)
Press T.MODE to light the “HD-AUTO”
or “AUTO” indicator on the display, then
use TUNING + or TUNING – to select the
station you want to hear.
When you enter the correct code, the
corresponding channel is locked.
0 – 9
3
SHIFT
MEMORY
Preset channel block selection
Press ENTER.
Preset memory registration
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
4
TV POWER
TV INPUT
(Default : Marantz)
• The
indicator lights on the display
• Channels under Parental Lock cannot be tuned in by performing
channel up/down or by category search.
when an HD Radio station is tuned in.
• When “HD-AUTO” (tuning mode) is
selected, only HD Radio stations are
tuned in.
• Channels stored in preset memory can be tuned in by the preset
channel select operation, even if Parental Lock is applied.
• When a channel to which Parental Lock is applied is being played,
Parental Lock for that channel is cancelled by performing step 2.
• See “Edit Lock Cord” (vpage 68) for the method of changing
Parental Lock Cord.
• If “AUTO” (tuning mode) is selected, both HD Radio and analog
stations are tuned in.
w To tune in manually (Manual tuning)
Press T.MODE to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then
use TUNING + or TUNING – to select the station you want to
hear.
• You can also set “Parental Lock” (vpage 67) from the menu.
• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in
manually.
• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold TUNING + or
TUNING – to change frequencies continuously.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “TUNER” (vpage 85). Press uiopto
return to the original screen.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Tuning in radio stations
nSelecting audio programs
Default settings
nDirect frequency tuning
HD Radio Technology enables stations to broadcast multiple Audio
Program and data services on HD2 / HD3 / HD4 channels.
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
Block (A – G)
and
Channel (1 – 8)
Default Settings
Press SEARCH/INFO.
1
2
Press uito select the audio
program.
If the station you are listening to has multiple
audio programs, “HD1” is indicated on the
display. If it only has one audio program,
“HD” is indicated.
87.5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 /
100.1 MHz
101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /
90.1 / 90.1 MHz
530 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 /
1710 kHz
A1 – A8
B1 – B8
C1 – C8
Input frequencies using the 0 – 9.
• If o is pressed, the immediately preceding
input is cancelled.
When setting is completed, press
3 ENTER.
D1 – D8
E1 – E8
F1 – F8
G1 – G8
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
nPresetting radio stations (Manual preset)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune
them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
The preset frequency is tuned in.
• Stationscanbepresetautomaticallyat“AutoPreset”(vpage67).
If “Auto Preset” is performed after performing “Manual Preset”, the
“Manual Preset” settings will be overwritten.
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station
(Preset Name) (vpage 68)
nCheck the HD Radio reception information
PressSTATUSwhileanHDRadio
broadcast is being received.
The current reception information is
shown on the display.
Tune in the broadcast station you
1 want to preset.
Listening to preset stations
Press MEMORY.
Press SHIFT/TOP MENU to select
2
1 the memory block (A to G).
q Normal
Press SHIFT/TOP MENU to select
Press PRESET +, PRESET – or
w Frequency / Signal strength
e Station name / Program and Program type
r Title name / Artist name
t Album name / Genre name
3 the block (A to G) in which to
2 1 – 8 to select the desired preset
preset the channel (1 to 8 per
block), then press PRESET +,
PRESET – or 1 – 8 to select the
preset number.
channel.
Press MEMORY again to complete
4 the setting.
NOTE
• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to
4.
If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while
and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the
analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed).
Because of this, the
indicator and text may flicker if the station
signal level is weak and unstable.
You can also operate via the main unit. In this
case, perform the following operations.
Press opto select the preset radio station.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Tuning in radio stations
Playing a network audio
nTuner (HD Radio reception) operation
Follow this procedure to play Internet radio stations or music or still
Slide show function
Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a media server can be
played as slide shows. The duration each picture is displayed can be
set.
Operation buttons
PRESET +, –
Function
picture (JPEG) files stored on a computer.
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation /
Multicast switching (ui)
Enter
Direct frequency tuning
Return
FM/AM switching
Switch search modes
Tuning (up/down)
Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /
Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)
Preset channel block selection
Preset memory registration
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
Important information
uiop
ENTER
SEARCH
RETURN
BAND
T.MODE
TUNING +, –
nAbout the internet radio function
• Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the
Internet.
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they
are stored in the folder.
Internet radio stations from around the world can be received.
• This unit is equipped with the following Internet radio functions:
• Stations can be selected by genre and region.
• Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.
• Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) format can be listened to.
• Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an
exclusive Marantz Internet radio URL from a Web browser on
a computer.
• The function is managed for individual users, so you must provide
your MAC or e-mail address.
Exclusive URL: http://www.radiomarantz.com
• The radio station database service may be suspended without
notice.
GCompatible formatsH
z1
Internet radio
Media server
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
0 – 9
P
P
SHIFT
MEMORY
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3)
P
P
P
WAV
TV POWER
TV INPUT
z2
MPEG-4 AAC
P
FLAC (Free Lossless
Audio Codec)
(Default : Marantz)
P
P
JPEG
• This unit’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio
station database service (vTuner). This database service provides
a list edited and created for this unit.
A server or server software compatible with distribution in the
corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
z1 Media server
• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using
MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
• WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
nMedia player
This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl)
stored on a computer (media server) connected to this unit via a
network.
With this unit’s network audio playback function, connection to the
server is possible using one of the technologies below.
• Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
• Windows Media DRM10
• FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16/24 bits.
z2 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on
this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright
protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from
a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending
on the computer’s settings.
Album art function
When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file
includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the
music files are playing.
For music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art
is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playing a network audio
GCompatible formatsH
Listening to internet radio
Sampling
frequency
Bit rate
Extension
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vvpage 85. Press uio
pto return to the original screen.
• When STATUS is pressed, the display
can be switched between the title
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment,
1
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps
.wma
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
MP3 (MPEG-1
32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps
.mp3
.wav
Audio Layer-3)
name and radio station name.
w If settings are required, make the
“NetworkConnecting”(vpage81).
WAV
32/44.1/48 kHz
–
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
Press NET/USB twice to switch
2 the input source to “NET/USB”.
nRecently played internet radio stations
Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from
“Recently Played”.
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
32/44.1/48/
–
.flac
Press ui to select “Internet
88.2/96 kHz
3 Radio”, then press ENTER or p.
Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.
• Selecting
in the “Source Select” menu, lets you directly select
Press ui to select “Recently
“Internet Radio”.
nAbout Flickr
1 Played”, then press ENTER or p.
Flickr is an online photograph sharing service that started in 2004.
You can use the this unit to view photographs that have been made
public by Flickr users. You do not need an account to use Flickr.
To view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an
account in order to upload these photographs to the Flickr server.
For details, see the Flickr homepage.
Press uito select the item you want to play, then
Press uito select the item you
4 press ENTER or p.
5
2 want to play, then press ENTER or
Repeat step 4 until the station list is displayed.
The station list is displayed.
p.
http://www.flickr.com/
nSearching stations by keyword
Press uito select the station, then press ENTER or
6 p.
(Alphabetic strings)
nAbout Napster
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Napster is a monthly subscription music distribution service
provided by Napster LLC. This service allows users to download
and play pieces of music they want to hear on this unit. Before
you can use Napster, you will need to visit the Napster website on
your PC to create an account and register as a member. For details,
access the following site:
Press uito select “Search by Keyword”, then press
1 ENTER or p.
• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the
quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the
tracks varies widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but
depending on the communication lines and server traffic, the music
or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. Inversely, lower
bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound
to be interrupted.
Search by Keyword
http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html
Enter Station
nAbout Pandora
Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet
radio service created by the Music Genome Project.
When you first listen to Pandora, it is necessary to subscribe to a
Pandora account at the Pandora homepage by your PC and register
this machine. See the Pandora homepage for details.
http://www.pandora.com/marantz
RETURN
Input
Keyboard
Submit
Insert
Cancel
Delete
SEARCH
INSERT
DELETE
• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is
busy or not broadcasting.
• For character input, see page 65.
• On this unit, folder and file names can be displayed as titles. Any
characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction,werecommendplaybackinM-DAXmode(vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
Input the characters, then press ENTER.
2
nAbout Rhapsody
Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks.
When you first listen to Rhapsody, it is necessary to subscribe to
a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage by your PC and
register this machine. See the Rhapsody homepage for details.
http://www.rhapsody.com/marantz
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Playing a network audio
nPresetting internet radio stations
nRegistering internet radio stations as your
Press oto select “Remove”.
Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.
favorites
3 The selected Internet radio station is cleared.
Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a
station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.
• To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p.
While the Internet radio station
1 you want to preset is playing,
press MEMORY.
Press MEMORY while the Internet
nInternet radio operation
1 radio station you want to register
Operation buttons
PRESET +, –
uiop
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation
Press ui to select “Preset”,
is playing.
2 then press ENTER.
Press ui to select “Favorites”,
Press SHIFT/TOP MENU, then
2 then press ENTER.
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
3 press PRESET +, PRESET – or
1 – 8 to select the desired preset
Press oto select “Add”.
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
3 The Internet radio station is registered.
number.
z1
z2
SEARCH
RETURN
2
Page search
/ Character search
Return
• If you do not want to register the station,
Press MEMORY again to complete
press p.
4 the setting.
Stop
The Internet radio station is now preset.
1 – 8
Preset channel selection
Preset channel block selection
nListening to internet radio stations registered in
SHIFT
your favorites
NOTE
MEMORY
Favorites / Preset memory registration
If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously
registered setting is cleared.
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Press AMP and then press
TV POWER
TV INPUT
1 SOURCE SEL to display the
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Source Select menu, then select
nListening to preset internet radio stations
(vpage 25).
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or
p(next page).
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select
the first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
AfterpressingSHIFT/TOPMENU,press
Press NET/USB and then press
PRESET +, PRESET – or 1 – 8 to select
2 uito select the Internet radio
the registered preset number.
This unit automatically connects to the
Internet and playback begins.
station, then press ENTER or p.
This unit automatically connects to the
Internet and playback begins.
nClearing internet radio stations from your
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO.
favorites
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may
not be able to perform a character search.
Press AMP and then press
1 SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
Press NET/USB and then press
2 ui to select the Internet radio
station you want to clear, then
press MEMORY.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playing a network audio
nMedia server operation
Playing files stored on a computer
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction,werecommendplaybackinM-DAXmode(vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uiop
to return to the original screen.
• Use STATUS to switch between
displaying the title name, artist name
or album name.
Operation buttons
PRESET +, –
Function
Preset channel selection
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
Prepare for playback.
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
uiop
q Check the network environment,
1
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
Stop
ENTER
(Press and hold)
w If settings are required, make the
“NetworkConnecting”(vpage81).
e Prepare the computer
z1
z2
SEARCH
RETURN
1
Page search
/ Character search
Return
(vComputer’s operating
instructions).
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Pause
8 9
3
nPlaying files that have been preset or registered
Press AMP and then press
2 SOURCE SEL to
in your favorites
display the
2
Stop
Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using
the same operations as for Internet radio stations (vpage 36).
Source Select menu, then select
1 – 8
Preset channel selection
(vpage 25).
SHIFT
Preset channel block selection
NOTE
MEMORY
Favorites / Preset memory registration
Press NET/USB and then use uito select the server
• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.
3 including the file to be played, then press ENTER or
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
• When the operations described below is performed, the media
server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to
play preset or favorite music files.
• When you quit the media server and then restart it.
• When music files are deleted or added on the media server.
• When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server
name.
TV POWER
TV INPUT
p.
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Use ui to select the search item or folder, then
4 press ENTER or p.
• Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”)
Repeat step 4 until the file is displayed.
5
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or
p(next page).
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select
the first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
Press uito select the file, then press ENTER or p.
6 Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
• Connections to the required system and specific settings must be
made in order to play music files (vpage 24).
• Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software
and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating
instructions of your server software.
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may
not be able to perform a character search.
• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may
be required for the file to be displayed.
• The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on
the server specifications. If the tracks/ files are not displayed in
alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the
first letter may not work properly.
• WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting
transcoding, such as Windows Media Player Ver. 11.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Playing a network audio
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
Press uito select the folder, and then press ENTER
Press NET/USB and then use ui to select “All
6or p.
3 Content”, then press ENTER or p.
You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the
photographs shared on Flickr.
Favorites
Displays the favorite photographs of the specified
user.
Press uito select the folder, and then press ENTER
4or p.
nViewing photographs shared by particular users
Photostream Displays a list of shared photographs.
Interestingness Displays photographs that are popular from the
number of user comments or number of times they
are added as favorites.
Prepare for playback.
PhotoSets
Contacts
Displays the folder (photograph album) list.
q Check the network environment,
1
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
Displays a Username registered for Flickr Contact by
a particular user.
Recent
Displays the most recently added photographs.
Remove this
Contact
Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.
Search by text Search for photographs by keyword.
w If settings are required, make the
“NetworkConnecting”(vpage81).
Press ui to select the file, and then press ENTER
Press ui to select the file, and then press ENTER
5or p.
Press AMP and then press
7or p.
2 SOURCE SEL to display the
The selected file is displayed.
The selected file is displayed.
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
NOTE
nViewing all photographs on Flickr
Depending on the file format, some photographs cannot be viewed.
[1/2]
Flickr
Prepare for playback.
nFlickr operation
q Check the network environment,
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
1
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
Operation buttons
PRESET +, –
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
w If settings are required, make the
“NetworkConnecting”(vpage81).
uiop
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
Stop
Press AMP and then press
2 SOURCE SEL to display the
Press NET/USB and then use ui to select “Add
ENTER
(Press and hold)
3 Flickr Contact”, then press ENTER or p.
Source Select menu, then select
z
(vpage 25).
SEARCH
RETURN
2
Page Search
Enter “Username”.
Return
Stop
4
[1/2]
Flickr
• For character input, see page 65.
1 – 8
Preset channel selection
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
SHIFT
Preset channel block selection
After inputting the “Username”, then press ENTER.
5The “Username” entered in step 4 is displayed.
• If the Username you typed in cannot be found, “The Flickr Contact
you entered could not be found” appears. Check and type in the
correct Username.
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV POWER
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o(previous page) or p
(next page).
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playing a network audio
nSearching from Napster menu
nRegistering tracks in my Napster library
Listening to Napster
Use uito select search item or
Press pwhile the track you wish
Prepare for playback.
1 folder, then press ENTER or p.
1 to register is playing.
q Check the network environment,
1
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
Repeat step 1 until the track is
Select “Add to my library”, then
2 press ENTER or p.
2 displayed.
w If settings are required, make the
“NetworkConnecting”(vpage81).
The track is entered in the Library.
Use uito select the track item, then press ENTER
3 or p.
Listening to tracks registered in my Napster library
Press AMP and then press
2 SOURCE SEL to display the
Use ui to select “My Napster
Source Select menu, then select
nEntering a character search for the track you
1 Library”, then press ENTER or
(vpage 25).
want to listen to
p.
Press NET/USB and then use ui p to input
Press SEARCH/INFO.
Use uito select the information
3 “Username” and “Password”.
1
2 or track, then press ENTER.
Napster Account
[1/8]
Napster
My Napster Library
T
Username
Password
Search by Artist
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction,werecommendplaybackinM-DAXmode(vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
N
Search by Albums
R
N
Search by Track
E
Staff Picks
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uiop
to return to the original screen.
OK
RETURN
Cancel
Enter Username
• Use STATUS to switch between
displaying the title name, artist name or
• You can search by artist name, album name or track name.
• For character input, see page 65.
album name.
After inputting the “Username” and “Password”,
Use uito select the search item, then press ENTER.
2 The search display appears.
4select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Napster is displayed.
Search by Artist
Enter Artist Name
NOTE
• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
• Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
RETURN
Input
Keyboard
Submit
Insert
Cancel
Delete
SEARCH
INSERT
DELETE
• For character input, see page 65.
Input the characters, then press ENTER.
3
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Playing a network audio
nNapster operation
Listening to Pandora
If you have a Pandora account, press uito select
3 “I have a Pandora account”, then press ENTER or p.
Operation buttons
PRESET +, –
Function
Preset channel selection
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage 81).
1
Pandora Account
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
uiop
Email address
Password
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
Stop
Press AMP and then press
ENTER
(Press and hold)
2 SOURCE SEL to display the
OK
RETURN
Cancel
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
z
SEARCH
RETURN
1
Search menu / Page search
Return
Enter Email address
Then press NET/USB.
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Stop
Input “Email address” and “Password”.
8 9
2
4
Pandora
• For character input, see page 65.
1 – 8
Preset channel selection
I have a Pandora account
I am new to Pandora
SHIFT
Preset channel block selection
After inputting the “Email address” and “Password”,
5select “OK”, then press ENTER.
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV POWER
If the “Email address” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Pandora is displayed.
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Enter
RETURN
TV INPUT
Cancel
NOTE
• Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”)
• If you do not have a Pandora account, press i to select “I am
new to Pandora”. The URL of Pandora and activation code are
displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC and register
the displayed activation code and account information. Then press
ENTER.
Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed,
select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o (previous
page) or p(next page).
To cancel, press uior SEARCH/INFO.
Pandora
I have a Pandora account
I am new to Pandora
Please got to
http://www.pandora.com/marantz and follow
the instructions there to create a new account.
Your aactivation code is
4DA2C67B
Continue
RETURN
Cancel
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playing a network audio
nCreating an original radio station
nArranging tracks within radio stations
You can sort tracks by operating the Pandora menu screen while
a track is playing.
nListening to a created radio station
You can create up to 100 original radio stations.
Listening to a created radio station
(e.g. D&M2 Radio)
By specifying your favorite track or artist name, music that has a
similar rhythm or sound is chosen and streamed.
Use uito select “New Station”,
1 then press ENTER or p.
Press pwhile a track is playing.
The Pandora menu screen is displayed.
[1/3]
My Station
[1/7]
Menu
Press uiand select the radio station
(“D&M2 Radio”) that you want to
New Station
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
I like this track
i don’t like this track
Why is this track playing?
Create station
Bookmark this track
I’m tired of this track
Delete this station
listen to, and press ENTER or p.
In Pandora, you can search for the track name
or artist name using “D&M2” as a keyword.
When the search is complete, tracks that
have a similar rhythm or sound are streamed.
RETURN
Exit
Sign out
• Press when you like the track that is being played.
• It will return to the Play Screen. And (Thumbs
up) icon is displayed. (The icon is not displayed on
the next track.)
• Press when you don’t like the track that is being
played.
Input a “Track Name” or “Artist Name”, then press
I like this track
D&M2 Radio
2 ENTER.
• For character input, see page 65.
Now Playing
Song
Artist
I don’t like
this track
Use uito select “Search by artist” or “Search by
00:15
Album
100%
3 track”, then press ENTER.
• It will return to the Play Screen. And
(Thumbs
You can search and display a list by track or artist.
MP3 128kbps
down) icon is displayed. (The icon is not displayed
on the next track.)
• Displays the reason why Pandora selected this
track.
Pause
Skip
Select
Menu
Press ui, select a file (e.g. D&M2) from the list,
4 and press ENTER or p.
Why is this
track playing?
Selected file is played back.
“Radio” is added to the end of a filename, and your original
radio station is created (e.g. D&M2 Radio).
• Creates a Station for the Track or Artist being
played.
Listening to created radio stations at random
Create station
• Bookmarks the track currently being played.
• You can check on a computer or iPhone etc.
• For details, see the Pandora web page.
• Press when you don’t like the track that is being
played.
Use uito select “Quick Mix”, then
Bookmark
this track
[1/4]
My Station
press ENTER or p.
New Station
Created radio stations are selected at
random, and tracks are streamed.
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
D&M2 Radio
I’m tired of
this track
• The track will not be played for 1 month.
• Press when you want to delete the station that is
being played.
Delete this
station
RETURN
Exit
Sign out
NOTE
• You can Skip up to 6 Tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.
• You can create up to 100 New Stations (radio stations).
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Playing a network audio
nSign out
nSelect the search mode
Listening to Rhapsody
Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.
Prepare for playback.
[1/4]
Rhapsody
While the Pandora top menu is
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage 81).
1
1 displayed, press RETURN.
Rhapsody Music Guide
q
[1/4]
Search
Rhapsody Channels
My Library
My Station
w
New Station
Press AMP and then press SOURCE SEL to display
e
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
D&M2 Radio
2 the Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
r
Then press NET/USB.
Use uito select “Sign in to
RETURN
Exit
Sign out
3 your account”, then press ENTER
q Search from Rhapsody latest information
or p.
When the popup menu appears, press o pto select
Use uito select “Rhapsody
2 “Yes”.
Rhapsody
1 Music Guide”, then press ENTER
or p.
Start a 30-day trial
Sign in to your account
nPandora operation
Press uito select the
2 information for track selection,
Operation buttons
Function
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, i)
then press ENTER or p.
uiop
RETURN
Enter
Cancel
• For character input, see page 65.
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
Stop
Repeat step 2 until the track is displayed.
Input Username and Password.
3
4
ENTER
(Press and hold)
4
Use uito select the track, then press ENTER or p.
z
SEARCH
RETURN
1
Page search
Return
Playback
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Rhapsody Account Sign In
Username
Password
w Enter a character search for the track you want
9
3
to listen to
Stop
OK
2
Use uito select “Search”, then
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
RETURN
Cancel
TV POWER
TV INPUT
1 press ENTER or p.
Enter Username
• For character input, see page 65.
Use uito select the search item,
(Default : Marantz)
2 then press ENTER or p.
After inputting the “Username” and “Password”,
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH, then press o(previous page) or p(next
page).
The search display appears.
5select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Rhapsody is displayed.
• You can search by artist name, album name,
track name or keyword.
To cancel, press uior SEARCH.
Enter the characters, then press ENTER.
NOTE
3
• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
• Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playing a network audio
nRhapsody operation
e Search from the Rhapsody internet radio station q Search from the similar music
Operation buttons
PRESET +, –
Function
Preset channel selection
Use uito select “Rhapsody
Use ui to select the search item,
then press ENTER or p.
1 Channels”, then press ENTER or
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
p.
uiop
Repeat step 1 until the radio
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
Stop
2 station is displayed.
ENTER
(Press and hold)
w Registering tracks in my library
Use ui to select radio station, then press ENTER
3 or p.
z1
z2
SEARCH
RETURN
1
Page search
/ Character search
Return
Use ui to select “Add to my
The search display appears.
library”, then press ENTER or p.
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Pause
The track is entered in the library.
8 9
3
r Listening to tracks registered in my library
Use uito select “My Library”,
2
Stop
1 then press ENTER or p.
1 – 8
Preset channel selection
e Rating function
SHIFT
Preset channel block selection
Repeat step 1 until the track is
Use uito select “Rating”, then
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
2 displayed.
TV POWER
1 press ENTER or p.
Use ui to select the information or track, then
TV INPUT
Use opto select the rating, then
(Default : Marantz)
3 press ENTER or p.
2 press ENTER.
• Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”)
After selecting, the information is displayed
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH, then press o (previous page) or p
(next page).
To cancel, press uior SEARCH twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH twice, then press o p to select the
first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction,werecommendplaybackinM-DAXmode(vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uiop
to return to the original screen.
nTrack menu
Press p during playback to display
the track menu.
[1/6]
Introduction
• Use STATUS to switch between
displaying the title name, artist name or
album name.
Jamp to artist
Jamp to album
Similar artists
Similar albums
Add to my library
Rating
q
w
To cancel, press uior SEARCH.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may
not be able to perform a character search.
e
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
This unit can play input audio signals in multi-channel surround mode or in stereo mode.
Select a listening mode suitable for the playback contents (cinema, music, etc.) or according to your liking.
Multi-channel playback
nSurround playback of 2-channel sources
Listening mode
Input audio
Playback
Listening mode
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
signal
1 42).
For 2-channel signal input:
• Surround-channel signals are created and played with surround playback.
For multichannel signal input:
• The surround signal recorded in source is played as surround playback.
(The sound is played according to the settings of the speaker size in
“Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).)
Press SURR. to select the
2-channel
2 surround decoder to play back
Multi-channel
playback (vpage 44)
Surround
multichannel sound.
Multi channel
• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is
pressed, the same function as with the
remote control unit can be obtained.
• Each time SURR. is pressed, the surround
mode is switched.
• Surround-back-channel or front-height-channel signals that are not
recorded in source can be created.
2-channel
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio
and are played.
• Subwoofer signals are also output.
Stereo playback
(vpage 46)
Stereo
Which decoder can be selected depends on
the settings of “Amp Assign” (vpage 78)
or “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).
Multi channel
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
• Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.
• In this mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.
z1
DOLBY PLgz
This mode is for 7.1-channel surround playback
using the front height speakers.
• “PLgz Height” is displayed.
This mode is for 7.1-channel or 6.1-channel
surround playback using the surround back
speakers.
• “PLgx Movie”, “PLgx Music” or “PLgx Game”
is displayed.
This mode is for 5.1-channel surround playback.
Select this mode if no front height speaker nor
surround back speaker is to be used.
• “PLg Movie”, “PLg Music”, “PLg Game” is
displayed.
This mode is for 7.1-channel, 6.1-channel or
5.1-channel surround playback using the surround
back speakers.
Stereo
2-channel
Direct playback
(vpage 46)
®
• Tone (vpage 73)
• Dynamic EQ (vpage 74)
• MultEQ XT (vpage 74)
• Dynamic Volume (vpage 75)
Surround
Multi channel
®
®
z2
DOLBY PLgx
• M-DAX (vpage 76)
2-channel
Dolby Virtual Speaker/
Dolby Headphone
playback (vpage 46)
Virtual
Surround
Virtual Surround processing is performed on 2-channel or multichannel
input signals that are played back.
Multi channel
DOLBY PLg
• Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal.
For details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding surround modes” (vpage 106).
• Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” (vpage 73) to enjoy your favorite sound mode.
• You can select the listening mode by pressing SURROUND MODE on the main unit.
DTS NEO:6
Press SURROUND MODE and the modes are switched as shown below.
• “DTS NEO:6 Cinema” or “DTS NEO:6 Music” is
displayed.
This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all
speakers.
AUTO*(STEREO)
DOLBY VS
STEREO
NEURAL
DOLBY PLgz
DOLBY PLg(x) Movie
DOLBY PLg(x) Music
DOLBY PLg(x) Game
MULTI CH
STEREO
MULTI CH STEREO
DTS NEO:6 cinema
DTS NEO:6 music
z For “AUTO”, press AUTO on the amplifier or remote control unit.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Multi-channel playback
z1 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”.
z2 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”.
z3 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS 96/24”.
z4 This surround mode is displayed when
“Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to
“ON–Height–” or “ON-–Wide–”.
Displaying the currently playing surround mode
z3
NEURAL
This mode is for 7.1-channel, 6.1-channel or
5.1-channel surround playback using the surround
back speakers.
Input signal
Surround mode
Display
DOLBY DIGITAL
(2ch)
NEURAL
• “NEURAL” is displayed.
NEURAL
z1 This can be selected when the “Amp Assign” (vpage 78)
setting in the menu is set to “Normal” is set to “A”.
z2 This can be selected when “Amp Assign” is set to “Normal” or
“Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” is not set to “None”.
z3 This mode supports analog 2-channel audio, and linear PCM 2
channel (44.1 kHz, 48 kHz) audio.
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
(other than 2ch) /
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY D + PL x MV
DOLBY D + PL x MS
DOLBY D PL z
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Movie
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Music
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx
Movie
GViews on the displayH
DOLBY DIGITAL +
DOLBY D + EX
GViews on the displayH
qShows a decoder to be
used.
DOLBY D + PL x MV
DOLBY D + PL x MS
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
q
w
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx
Music
wShows Audyssey
q
w
qShows a decoder to be used.
• A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus decoder is displayed
as “DOLBY D +”.
wShows a decoder that creates sound output
from the surround back speakers.
• “+ PLgz” indicates the front height sound
from front height speakers.
DSX™ processing.
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgz
DOLBY TrueHD
DOLBY D + PL z
DOLBY TrueHD
DOLBY HD EX
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Movie
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Music
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz
DTS SURROUND
nSurround playback of multi-channel sources
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS (5.1ch) /
DOLBY HD +PL x MV
DOLBY HD +PL x MS
DOLBY HD PL z
DTS SURROUND
DTS PL x MV
DTS PL x MS
DTS PL z
(Dolby Digital, DTS etc.)
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
1 42).
DTS + PLgx Movie
DTS + PLgx Music
Press SURR. to select the
For an input signal that can be reproduced in
each surround mode, see “Surround modes and
parameters” (vpage 104).
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 / DTS + PLgz HEIGHT
2 surround decoder to play back
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 /
DTS 96/24
DTS + NEO:6
DTS ES MTRX6.1
DTS NEO:6
multichannel sound.
z1
DTS ES MTRX6.1
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
DTS 96/24
z2
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is
pressed, the same function as with the
remote control unit can be obtained.
• Select the surround mode while viewing
the display on the screen (v“Displaying
the currently playing surround mode” at
right).
z3
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD HI RES
DTS-HD MSTR
DTS-HD + NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgx MOVIE
DTS-HD + PLgx MUSIC
DTS-HD + PLgz HEIGHT
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES
DTS-HD MSTR
DTS-HD NEO:6
DTS-HD PL x MV
DTS-HD PL x MS
DTS-HD PL z
DTS Express
DTS-HD
• Which decoder can be selected depends on the input signal,
the settings of “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) or “Speaker Config.”
(vpage 78).
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgx MOVIE
MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC
MULTI IN + PLgz HEIGHT
MULTI CH IN 7.1
MULTI Dolby EX
MULTI IN PL x MV
MULTI IN PL x MS
MULTI IN PL z
MULTI CH IN 7.1
DOLBY VS
PCM (multi ch)
All Input signal
Dolby VIRTUAL SPEAKER
All signals indicated
above
z4
Audyssey DSX
Audyssey DSX
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
nDolby Headphone mode
Stereo playback
You can enjoy listening to multi-channel surround sound through
headphones using this mode.
• To cancel, press P.DIRECT again.
• Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the
PURE DIRECT mode.
This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.
• Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel
audio and are played.
Press SURR. to select the Dolby
Headphone mode.
NOTE
When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the menu screen is not displayed.
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
1 42).
2 Stereo playback begins.
Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby
Headphone playback
• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is
pressed, the same function as with the
remote control unit can be obtained.
Press STEREO.
nDolby Virtual Speaker mode
This delivers a full surround sound experience from two stereo
speakers.
Direct playback
• Each time SURR. is pressed, the Dolby
Headphone mode is switched.
• Sound is output from the front left and right speakers.
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channnel
audio.
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
• Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.
• In this mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.
• Tone (vpage 73)
• Dynamic EQ (vpage 74) • Dynamic Volume (vpage 75)
• M-DAX (vpage 76)
DOLBY
HEADPHONE
This is the surround mode for listening with
headphones.
®
• MultEQ XT (vpage 74)
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
®
®
The surround sound field is played through regular
headphones.
1 42).
Press SURR. to select “DOLBY
DOLBY HP
BYPASS
The sound is played in the normal stereo mode
rather than the surround mode when listening with
headphones.
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
2 VS”.
1 42).
DOLBY HP
This mode is best suited for movie sources.
Press P.DIRECT to select the
PLgMovie
2 direct mode.
DOLBY HP
This mode is best suited for music sources.
• If PURE DIRECT on the main unit is
pressed, the same function as with the
remote control unit can be obtained.
PLgMusic
NOTE
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the
plug is removed from the jack.
• Each time P.DIRECT is pressed, the
direct mode is switched.
• You can select Dolby HP PLgMovie or Dolby HP PLgMusic when a
2-channel source is played back.
Source Direct This mode plays back tracks at high sound quality
without passing through the sound quality adjustment
circuits.
z
Pure Direct
This mode plays back tracks at the closest to the
original sound quality.
Auto
This mode detects the type of input digital signal,
and automatically selects the corresponding mode
for playback.
z The following circuits that affect sound quality are set to off.
• Main unit’s display circuit (The display is turned off.)
• Analog video input/output circuit
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Advanced
version
Advanced version
Here, we explain functions and operations that let you make better use of this unit.
FSpeaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) vpage 48
FPlayback (Advanced operation) vpage 55
FPlayback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) vpage 61
FHow to make detailed settings vpage 63
FOperating the connected devices by remote control unit vpage 90
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection)
This section provides the installation, connection,
and setup methods of speaker systems other
than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back
When 7.1ch (Surround back / Front height / Front
wide speaker) installed
Install
This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX™ (vpage 109) and
DolbyProLogicgz(vpage110), whichoffersanevenwiderand
deeper surround sensation.
When using Audyssey DSX, install front wide speakers or front
height speakers.
speakers).
FHL
FHR
For the speaker installation, connection, and setup
methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround
back speakers, see “Simple version (Simple setup
guide)” (vpage 4).
FR
FL
SW
When using Dolby Pro Logic gz, install front height speakers.
C
FWR
FWL
®
Use Audyssey Auto Setup function of this unit
to automatically detect the number of connected
speakers and perform optimal settings for the
speakers to be used.
Install the surround back speakers in a position 2 to 3 ft (60 to 90 cm)
higher than ear level.
SL
SR
Surround
Front height
speaker
speaker
Listening
position
Procedure for speaker settings
• Point slightly
downwards
At least
Front wide
z1 speaker
Install
SBL
SBR
3.3 ft / 1 m
2 – 3 ft /
60 – 90 cm
z2
45˚
Surround back
speaker
• Point slightly
downwards
Front
speaker
z1 22˚ – 30˚
z4 90˚ – 110˚
z2 22˚ – 45˚
z5 135˚ – 150˚
z3 55˚ – 60˚
Connect (vpage 49)
GViewed from the sideH
When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed
z1 Recommended for Dolby Pro Logic gz
Set up speakers (vpage 52)
z2 Recommended for Audyssey DSX
NOTE
FL
FR
Sound is not output simultaneously from the surround back speakers,
front height speakers, and front wide speakers. You can switch
between speakers by changing the settings in surround mode or
Audyssey DSX.
SW
C
z1
z2
SL
SR
Listening position
SB
z1 22˚ – 30˚
z2 90˚ – 110˚
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Install
Connect
When 5.1ch installed
• For the method of connecting the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see page 5.
• For the method of connecting the TV, see page 7.
nExample of connections to Marantz MM7055 and MM7025 power amp
FL
FR
SW
7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) connection
For 7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.
C
GMM7025H
z1
z2
SL
SR
Listening
position
GMM7025H
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
z1 22˚ – 30˚
z2 120˚
When Front A/B speakers installed
GMM7025H
FL(B) FL(A)
FR(A) FR(B)
GMM7055H
SW
FHL
FHR
FWR
FL
FR
SW
Listening position
FWL
C
FL Front speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R)
SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SBR Surround back speaker (R)
FHL Front height speaker (L)
FHR Front height speaker (R)
FWL Front wide speaker (L)
FWR Front wide speaker (R)
C
Center speaker
SW Subwoofer
SL Surround speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R)
SB Surround back speaker
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
49
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Connect
6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) connection
If you are using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the UNBALANCED or BALANCED PRE OUT
SBL terminals on the power amp.
5.1-channel connection
For 5.1-channel playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.
For speaker settings in this case, see “When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed” (vpage 48).
For 6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
GMM7055H
GMM7025H
GMM7055H
FL
FR
SW
C
FL
FR
SW
C
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
50
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Connect
Front A/B connection
2.1-channel connection
Bi-Amp connection
A second set of front speakers can be connected to the
UNBALANCED PRE OUT HL/HR terminals on the power amp.
In this case, perform the settings using the SPKR A/B button on
the remote control or main unit (vpage 26 “Set the front speakers
to be used”).
A bi-amp connection is to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter
terminals and woofer terminals of speakers compatible with the bi-amp
function. This prevents the back electromotive force (returned force without
output) of the woofer sent to the tweeter, which affects the sound quality of
the tweeter, and you can enjoy playback with higher-quality sound.
In this case, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “SPKR-C”.
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
GMM7025H
FL SW
FR
GMM7055H
GMM7055H
SW
FL
FR
q
w
q
w
FL(B) FL(A)
FR(A) FR(B)
(L)
(R)
nFor connecting four subwoofers
Four subwoofers can be connected to this unit.
The same signal is output from each subwoofer terminal.
When a Bi-Amp connection is used, the same signal is output from the
UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT FL/FR and SBL/SBR terminals.
For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect the center
speaker, surround speakers and subwoofers, 5.1-channel playback is
available.
For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect
the center speaker, surround speakers, surround back speakers
(or front wide speakers) and subwoofers, 7.1-channel playback is
available.
Front speakers can be used separately, depending on the
speaker’s specifications or playback source such as front speakers
(A) for multichannel playback and front speakers (B) for 2-channel
playback.
NOTE
• Use speakers compatible with bi-amp connections.
• When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting
plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.
51
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
around items indicate the settings.
Set up speakers
This section provides the setup methods of speaker systems other than the 7.1-channel system
(with surround back speakers).
Set up “Amp Assign”
Set up “Channel Select”
3
5
6
For the setup methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see “Simple
version”, “Set up speakers (Audyssey Auto Setup)” (vpage 8) of “Simple version”.
®
Use ui to select “Amp Assign”,
and then press ENTER.
Use uito select “Channel Select”,
and then press ENTER.
First install and connect the speakers to this unit.
AUTO SETUP
AUTO SETUP
Before Auto Setup measurement, the settings shown below can be made.
• Changing the amplifier assignment (Amp Assign)
The signal output from the UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of this unit can
be switched to match your speaker environment. (vpage 52 “Set up “Amp Assign””).
• Setting the channels to be used (Channel Select)
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
MultEQ XT
STEP1 Preparation
[1/6]
STEP1 Preparation
[1/6]
Connect the speakers
and place them accord-
ing to the recommenda-
tions in the manual.
Set the following
Connect the speakers
and place them accord-
ing to the recommenda-
tions in the manual.
Set the following
items if necessary.
Amp Assign
items if necessary.
Amp Assign
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and
measuring time can be reduced (vpage 52 “Set up “Channel Select””).
Channel Select
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
Auto Setup Start
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
Set use of surround back ch. for your system
Skip unused ch’s measurement for timesaving
nAudio output from each PRE OUT terminal
PRE OUT Channel
UNBALANCED PRE
Use o p to select the configuration
Use uito select a channel.
FL/FR
FL/FR
C
C
SW1/SW2
SW1/SW2
SL/SR
SL/SR
SBL/SBR
HL/HR
---
WL/WR
---
OUT terminal
BALANCED PRE
OUT terminal
4 of the connected speakers, and then
SBL/SBR
Subwoofer Select for no subwoofers to be
press RETURN.
used. In this case, go to step 7.
Select for no surround back
speakers to be used. In this case,
go to step 8.
• “Surround Back” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
Select for no front height speakers
to be used. In this case, go to step
9.
• “Front Height” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
Select for no front wide speakers to
be used. In this case, go to step 9.
• “Front Wide” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
Subwoofer 1 /
Subwoofer 2
Surround
Back*
Front Height /
Front B
Normal
Set
when
using
surround
Audio Output
Front A Center
Surround
Front Wide
Surround
back, front height or front wide
speakers. In this case, go to step
5.
Set for connecting the speakers
for ZONE2.
Back
*The output audio differs depending on the “Amp Assign” settings.
ZONE2
ZONE3
SPKR-C
Connect the setup microphone.
Set up the
remote control unit
Front
1
2
Set for connecting the speakers
for ZONE3.
Height
n Set up the operation mode
Press AMP to set the remote control unit
to amplifier operation mode.
Set for connecting the tweeter
of the front speaker to the
UNBALANCED and BALANCED
PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of
the power amp, and the woofer
of the front speaker to the FL/FR
terminals.
Front Wide
When the setup microphone is
connected, the following screen is
displayed.
GWhen “Subwoofer” is selected in
7 step 6H
Use opto select the item.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
MultEQ XT
Measure Set for measuring a subwoofer.
STEP1 Preparation
[1/6]
Skip
Set for no measuring of a subwoofer.
Connect the speakers
and place them accord-
ing to the recommenda-
tions in the manual.
Set the following
Press AMP
items if necessary.
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
Start Auto Setup
Remote control operation
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
buttons
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Set up speakers
Connections (Advanced connection)
GWhen “Surround Back” is selected
8 in step 6H
Use opto select the item.
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
Set for measuring two surround back
speakers.
Measure
(2spkrs)
When you use this unit connected to Marantz audio components, it sends operation signals to operate each component.
nConnection
Set for measuring a surround back
speaker.
Measure
(1spkr)
Use the remote connection cable (supplied with a Marantz audio component you want to connect) to connect the REMOTE CONTROL OUT
terminal of this unit to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of the component to be connected.
Set for no measuring of a surround
back speaker.
Skip
nSetting
Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the connected audio component to “EXTERNAL” or “EXT.” to use this feature.
• This setting will disable remote sensor reception of the connected audio component.
• To operate the connected audio component, point the remote control at the remote sensor of this unit.
GWhen “Front Height” or “Front
9 Wide” is selected in step 6H
Use opto select the item.
Wireless receiver RX101 (vpage 23)
Set to measure the front height
Measure
speakers or front wide speakers.
Skip
Set when you do not want to measure
the front height speakers or front wide
speakers.
Press RETURN.
10 Proceed to page 9 STEP1 Preparation
step 5.
NOTE
®
After performing Audyssey Auto Setup, do not
change the speaker connections or subwoofer
volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey
Auto Setup again.
REMOTE
REMOTE
CONTROL
CONTROL
OUT IN
OUT IN
MM7055
MM7025
Remote control unit
NOTE
To use wireless receiver RX101 as external
IR receiver, set the remote sensor function
of this unit to “Remote Lock:ON” (vpage 89
“Remote control settings”).
REMOTE
CONTROL
REMOTE
CONTROL
REMOTE
CONTROL
IN OUT
IN OUT
IN OUT
CD recorder
DVD player
CD player
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
53
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
RS-232C connector
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks
When you connect an external control device, you can control this unit When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device’s
with the external control device.
power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this
unit.
The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V/150 mA electrical signal.
External serial controller
12 V/150 mA trigger-compatible device
Perform the operation below beforehand.
q Turn on the power of this unit.
w Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller.
e Check that the unit is in the standby mode.
in Set as Necessary
Set to change the conditions for linked operation via the DC OUT
1 or 2 jack.
“Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out 2” (vpage 85)
NOTE
If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger
than 12V/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used.
In this case, turn off the power to the unit, and disconnect it.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playback (Advanced operation)
Set the HDMI output connector corresponding with
Convenient functions
Playback (Basic operation) (vpage 25)
1 the HDMI control function.
Set “HDMI Control” (vpage 80) to “ON“.
HDMI control function
When you make an HDMI connection with a TV or player compatible
with this unit and HDMI control functions, you can perform the
following operations by setting the HDMI control function of each
device.
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
(vpage 44)
Turn the power on for all the equipment connected
2 by HDMI cable.
n HDMI control function (vpage 55)
n Sleep timer function (vpage 56)
n Adjusting the volume of the speakers (vpage 56)
n Operating a wireless LAN-compatible mobile
terminal to play music and still pictures (vpage 57)
n Web control function (vpage 58)
Set the HDMI control function for all equipment
3 connected by HDMI cable.
• Please consult the operating instructions for the connected
equipment to check the settings.
n This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off
step.
n You can switch audio output devices with a TV
• Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the equipment be unplugged.
operation.
Switch the television input to the HDMI input
When you set “Output audio from amp” in the TV audio output
setup operation, you can switch the amp power on.
4 connected to this unit.
n Panel lock function (vpage 60)
n Various memory functions (vpage 60)
Switch this unit input to the HDMI input source and
n You can adjust this unit volume in the TV volume
adjustment operation.
n You can switch this unit input sources through
linkage to TV input switching.
n When playing the player, this unit input source
switches to the source for that player.
5 check if the picture from the player is ok.
When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check
6 that the power of this unit also goes to standby.
If the HDMI control function does not operate properly, check the
following points.
NOTE
• Is the TV or player compatible with the HDMI control function?
• Is “HDMI Control” (vpage 80) set to “ON”?
• Is “Power Off Control” (vpage 81) set to “All” or “Video”?
• Are the HDMI control function settings of all equipment correct?
• Is the television connected to the HDMI OUT 1 connector?
• The HDMI control function only supports the HDMI OUT 1 connector.
To use the HDMI control function, connect the television to the
HDMI OUT 1 connector.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more
standby power.
• The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is
compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV
and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control.
• Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or
player. Check the user guide of each device for details beforehand.
• When“PowerOffControl”onthemenuissetto“OFF”(vpage81),
this unit is not set to standby even if the connected device is in the
standby mode.
NOTE
Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking
function may be reset, in which case, repeat steps 2 and 3.
• “Input Assign” – “HDMI” (vpage 69) setting has changed.
• “Monitor Out” (vpage 80) setting is changed.
• There is a change to the connection between the equipment and the
HDMI, or an increase in equipment.
• When connection changes are implemented, such as adding
connections to HDMI devices, linked operations may be initialized.
In this case, you will need to reconfigure the settings.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it is not possible to assign an
HDMI connector to “TV” at “Input Assign” (vpage 69).
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Convenient functions
nAdjusting the volume of groups of speakers
Sleep timer function
Adjusting the volume of the speakers
(Fader function)
The power automatically goes into standby once the set time has You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback
This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound all at once from the
front (front speaker / front height speaker / front wide speaker /
center speaker) or rear (surround speaker / surround back speaker).
elapsed.
sources or to suit your taste, as described below.
This is convenient for playing sources while going to sleep.
nAdjusting the volume of the different speakers
Press AMP to set the remote
Press AMP to set the remote
1 control unit to amplifier operation
Press AMP to set the remote
1 control unit to amplifier operation
1 control unit to amplifier operation
mode.
mode.
mode.
Press SLEEP and display the time
Press CH LVL.
2 you want to set.
Press CH LVL.
2
2
The
indicator on the display lights.
CHANNEL LEVEL
• If SLLEP on the main unit is pressed,
the same function as with the remote
control unit can be obtained.
CHANNEL LEVEL
Front L
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
Front L
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
Front R
Front R
Center
Center
Subwoofer
Surround L
Surround R
S.Back L
S.Back R
Subwoofer
Surround L
Surround R
S.Back L
S.Back R
Fader
Front
Rear
Fader
Front
Rear
Select
Select
Press i to select “Fader”, then select the item to be
Use uito select the speaker.
3 The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the
buttons is pressed.
3 adjusting using op.
Use opto adjust the volume of the speakers.
4 (o: front, p: rear)
Use opto adjust the volume.
4
• In the case of a subwoofer, pressing owhen it is at “–12 dB” will
change the setting to “OFF”.
• The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.
• The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker is adjusted
to the lowest value of –12 dB.
• The time switches as shown below each time SLEEP is pressed.
OFF
10 min
20
30
40
50
120
100
90
80
70
60
110
• When a headphone jack is inserted, the headphone channel level
can be adjusted.
• When the input mode setting is “7.1CH IN”, you can adjust the
channel level while the 7.1CH INPUT connector is being used. In
that case, “7.1CH IN Level” appears at the top of the screen.
To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to set “OFF”.
The
indicator on the display turns off.
• The sleep timer setting is canceled if this unit’s power is set to
standby or turned off.
• When power to the main zone is turned off with the sleep timer,
power in ZONE2 and ZONE3 are also turned off.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Convenient functions
nPlaying contents on a mobile terminal device
Operating a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal to play
music and still pictures
• Perform this procedure using a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal conforming to the DLNA (Digital
Living Network Alliance) standard.
Wireless LAN-
Mobile terminal device
This unit
compatible router
• This function allows you to play content located on a computer (media server) or mobile terminal device
connected on a network by operating a mobile terminal device on the same network.
• There are two types of operations on the mobile terminal device.
e Start playback.
r Operate.
nPlaying content on a computer (Media server)
q Select content.
w Select a player.
Wireless LAN-
Computer
(Media server)
This unit
compatible router
Select the content you want to play from among the mobile terminal devices.
Streaming
Streaming
1
From the mobile terminal device, select this unit from among the products on the
2 network.
Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.
e Start playback.
r Operate.
q Select content.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name” (vpage 82 “Friendly Name Edit”).
• The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device:
• File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)
• Volume adjustment
w Select a player.
•
is displayed on the menu screen while the mobile terminal device is being operated.
Mobile terminal device
• For the various settings and operating procedures, see the operating instructions of the mobile terminal
devices being used.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name”. “Friendly Name” can be edited at “Friendly Name Edit” (vpage 82) as desired so that it is easily
distinguishable from other devices.
• When playback is started from the mobile terminal device, this unit’s input source automatically switches
to “NET/USB”. Also, when the “Network Standby” setting (vpage 82) is set to “ON”, the power
automatically turns on.
From the mobile terminal device, browse the media server on the same network
1 and choose the content you want to play.
From the mobile terminal device, select this unit from among the products on the
2 network.
Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name” (vpage 82 “Friendly Name Edit”).
NOTE
• The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device:
• File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)
• Volume adjustment
When operations related to browsing or playback (play, stop, pause, track search) are performed on this
unit while operating the mobile terminal device, the connection to the network is disconnected.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Convenient functions
Web control function
When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
Operate.
4 item you want to operate.
5
You can operate this unit using a browser.
GExample 1HMain zone control screen
Marantz Web Controller
AV7005
MAIN ZONE
Switch the “Network Standby” setting to “ON”.
>
>
>
>
POWER
ON
STANDBY
ZONE CONTROL
CHANNEL LEVEL
NET AUDIO / USB
iPod Direct
MAIN ZONE
1 (vpage 82).
Status
Sleep Timer
y
-25.0dB
ZONE2
SOURCE
NET/USB
Check the IP address of this unit with “Network
Status
w
-25dB
2 Information” (vpage 83).
Player
ZONE3
Status
u
Video
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK INFORMATION
-60dB
RELOAD
TOP MENU
Network
Tuner
r
e
t
Setup Menu
PDA Menu
Friendly Name
DHCP
marantz:[AV7005]
ON
Add To Your Favorite
Wed Control Config.
<
>
LUME
-75.5dB
i
o
IP Address
MAC Address
192.168.100.19
∞
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10
0
10 18
************
w Click when you operate each zone. (vGExample 1H)
e Click when you operate the setup menu. (vGExample 2H)
r Click to change the Web control screen setting.
(vGExample 3H)
Note
To use the web control function,set the GUI menu “Manual Setup” - “Network Setup” -
“Other” -“Network Standby” setting to “ON”
Checking the IP address.
y Click to perform individual operations.
t Click when you operate a small screen such as a PDA screen,
etc. (vGExample 4H)
Changes to individual operation screens. (vGExample 5H)
u Click when you update to the latest information.
Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time
you operate. When operating from the main unit, click this or else
the screen will not be updated.
RETURN Return
Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
3 box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”,
enter “http://192.168.100.19”.
i Click to return to the top menu.
Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in
GExample 3H
o Click to add a setting to “Favorites” in your browser.
We recommend registering the setting screens for the different
zones in the browser’s favorites so as not to accidentally perform
menu operations for zones you do not intend to operate.
http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
q
File Edit View Favorites Tools Help
INDEX
Marantz Web Controller
AV7005
MAIN ZONE
Status
-25.0dB
ZONE2
Status
-25dB
ZONE3
Status
-60dB
Setup Menu
Wed Control Config.
q Entering the IP address.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Convenient functions
GExample 2HSetup menu screen
SOURCE SELECT ReLoad
GExample 4HPDA menu screen
Marantz Web Controller
Main Zone Control
GExample 6HDedicated iPod Touch screen
Main Zone
Q
SETUP MENU
Source
DVD
Q
Zone Power
Source
Input Assign
Q
Multi Zone2 Control
Multi Zone3 Control
SOURCE SELECT
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
MANUAL SETUP
INFORMATION
SAVE
Video
Video Select SOURCE
Video Mode
Video Convert
i/p Scaler
Auto
ON
Game
OFF
Movie
Analog Analog & HDMI
Auto 480p/576p 1080i
Auto 480p/576p 1080i
AUTO
Full
OFF
Q
Resolution(analog)
Resolution(HDMI)
Progressive Mode
Aspect
720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz
720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz
LOAD
Q
VIDEO1 VIDEO2
Normal
Q Select this item to operate each zone.
Input Mode
Input Mode Auto
Decode Mode Auto
NOTE
You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the
PDA menu screen.
Rename DVD
Set Def
0
Q
Q
iPod Direct NetAudio/USB
Volume
Source Level(analog)
<
<
Set
dB
GExample 5HNet Audio operating screen
Down
Up
0
Q Click the menu item from which you want to make settings.
The display on the right becomes the individual setting screens.
Q Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click
“LOAD” when you want to call settings.
Q Click “v” and select from the displayed items.
Q Click an item to make a setting.
NET AUDIO/USB(MAIN ZONE)
>
-60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10
>
>
>
Now Playing
HOT LOVE & EMOTION
/VIRGINELLE
128kbps
• When accessed from the iPod Touch browser, an optimized
operation screen is displayed.
Q
Q After entering characters, click “Set” to set, or click “Def” to
return to default setting.
Q Enter figures or click “<” or “>” to make the setting, and then
click “Set”.
W
W
W
W
GExample 3HWeb configuration screen
PRESET OFF
PRESET MEMORY A1
REPEAT
MEMORY CHARACTER SEARCH
RANDOM
Web Controller Config.
Top Menu Link Setup
Q
W
W
W
ONE
ALL
OFF
ON
OFF
∞
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
18
ON OFF
<
-75dB
>
Back Top Menu
Q
Q Click the menu items. from which you want to play.
W Click “v” to select the preset channel you want to play.
W When registering presets, click “v” to select the channel you
want to register, and then click “MEMORY”.
W When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select from the
displayed characters.
Q Click “ON” when performing Top Menu Link Setup.
When set up, return to the top menu from each operation screen.
(Default setting : “OFF”)
Q Click this item to return to the top menu.
W Click this item to play back repeatedly.
W Click this item when selecting menu items.
W Click to stop playback.
W Click this item to play back randomly.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Convenient functions
nCanceling the Panel lock function
Panel lock function
Various memory functions
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation
of the buttons on the front panel.
ON/STANDBY
i
nPersonal memory plus function
This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, HDMI
®
®
®
,
output mode, MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ , Dynamic Volume
audio delay etc.) last selected for the individual input sources.
nDisabling all key button operations
ON/STANDBY
The surround parameters, tone settings and the volumes of the
different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes.
nLast function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going
into the standby mode.
When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored.
DISPLAY
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold i and
DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
The Panel lock function is canceled.
AUTO DISPLAY
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold AUTO and
DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
“Panel Lock:ON” appears on the display and all button operations
except ON/STANDBY are disabled.
Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit
using the remote control unit.
nDisabling all button operations except VOLUME
ON/STANDBY
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
DISPLAY
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold PURE
DIRECT and DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
“Panel Lock:ON” appears on the display and all button operations
except ON/STANDBY and VOLUME are disabled.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
• You can operate this unit so as to enjoy audio in a room (ZONE2, ZONE3) other than the MAIN ZONE
(room where the unit is located).
• You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can
also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
“Amp Assign” setting
(vpage78)andaudio
signals output
Connecting the speakers
Audio output
There are two methods to do this, as described below. Choose one of the methods.
q Zone playback by audio output(UNBALANCED and BALANCED)
w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
Use an external amplifier.
ZONE3
ZONE3
ZONE3
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
q
Zone playback by audio output (UNBALANCED and BALANCED)
(L)
(R)
Using the amplifier assign function, zone 2 and zone 3 auto signals are output from this unit’s UNBALANCED
and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals.
w
q w
q
nConnecting and setting the speakers
(Example of connections to Marantz MM7025 power amp)
“Amp Assign” setting
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
(vpage78)andaudio
Connecting the speakers
signals output
w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
nAudio connections (ZONE2, ZONE3)
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals are output to the ZONE2 and
ZONE3 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers.
ZONE2
MAIN ZONE
ZONE3
ZONE2
ZONE2
This unit
ZONE2
L
L
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
R
R
(L)
(R)
AUX IN
AUX IN
w
q w
q
We recommend using high quality pin-plug cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise.
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
NOTE
• When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected
in ZONE2 or ZONE3, playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM (2-channel) format.
• It is not possible to play the digital audio signals input from the HDMI terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Use analog connections for ZONE2 or ZONE3 playback.
• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio
output connectors.
• The menu screen is not output.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Video output
Playback
Press Z2 or Z3 to switch the
Adjusting the volume
Video Connection
The video signals of this unit’s ZONE2 video output terminal are
played by the ZONE2TV.
1 remote control operating mode.
Use VOLUME to adjust the volume.
The remote control unit switches to the
operating mode for ZONE2 or ZONE3.
– – – –80dB – –40dB – 18dB
GAdjustable rangeH
(When the “Volume Display” (vpage 84) setting is “Relative”)
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
Press ON to turn on the ZONE2
2 or ZONE3 power.
GAdjustable rangeH
0 – 41 – 99
VIDEO
IN
(When the “Volume Display” (vpage 84) setting is “Absolute”)
• At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” (vpage 83) is set to “–10dB
(71)”.
This unit
The
or
indicator on the
VIDEO
ZONE2
display lights.
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
• When STANDBY is pressed, ZONE2 or
ZONE3 turns off.
Y
PB PR
• Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned
on or off by pressing SOURCE ON/OFF.
• Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned
on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF or
ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to adjust
the sound volume.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press MUTE.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage 84) in
the menu.
• To cancel, either adjust the volume or press MUTE again.
• The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.
NOTE
Press INPUT df.
• It is not possible to output video signals input to the HDMI terminals
to ZONE2.
• When using component output terminal 2 for ZONE2 video signal
output, set “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Component2
Output” (vpage 85) in the menu to “ZONE2”.
• The menu screen is not output.
3 The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
• Turn INPUT SELECTOR after
pressing ZONE SELECT on the
main unit to select an input
source.
You can adjust the tone and volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 in “Zone
Setup” (vpage 83) in the menu.
When power for both MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 is set to ON, power of
the MAIN ZONE only can be turned off. Select “AMP” in step 1 then
press STANDBY.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
How to make detailed settings
Setting items
Detailed items
Audio Adjust
Picture Adjust
Description
Page
Menu map
1. Audio/Video Adjust
Adjuts various audio parameters.
Adjusts the picture quality.
73
77
For menu operation, connect a TV to this unit and
display the menu on the TV screen. For menu
operations, see the following page.
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Audio Adjust
Picture Adjust
2. Information
Status
Shows information about current settings.
Shows information about audio input signals.
Displays the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information.
Shows information about tuner or network preset channels.
88
88
88
88
Audio Input Signal
HDMI Information
Preset Channel
INFORMATION
MENU
Status
Audio Input Signal
HDMI Information
Preset Channel
Audio/Video Adjust
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup
3. Auto Setup
Audyssey Auto Setup
Parameter Check
Makes the optimum settings for the speakers being used automatically.
8
12
®
Checks Audyssey Auto Setup measurement results.
AUTO SETUP
This item is only displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup procedure has been
performed.
Audyssey Auto Setup
Parameter Check
Adjust various audio and video parameters
Items that only need to be set
once
Set these for example upon purchase.
Once these items are set, there is
no need to set them again unless
the speaker layout or the connected
speakers have been changed.
4. Manual Setup
Speaker Setup
HDMI Setup
Audio Setup
Network Setup
Zone Setup
Sets the speaker size and distance, the channel level, etc.
Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output.
Makes settings for audio playback.
Makes network settings.
Makes settings for audio playback in a multi-zone (ZONE2/ZONE3) system.
Makes various other settings.
78
80
81
81
83
84
MANUAL SETUP
Speaker Setup
HDMI Setup
Audio Setup
Network Setup
Zone Setup
Option Setup
Option Setup
5. Input Setup
Auto Preset
Preset Skip
Parental Lock
Antenna Aiming
Preset Name
Input Assign
Video
Input Mode
Rename
Source Level
Playback Mode
Still Picture
Uses the auto preset function to program radio stations.
Sets the preset memories that you do not want to display when tuning.
Sets the Parental Lock.
Adjusts the SIRIUS reception sensitivity.
Assigns name to a preset memory.
67
67
67
68
68
68
69
71
71
71
71
72
(Example: “HD Radio”)
INPUT SETUP
Auto Preset
Preset Skip
Preset Name
Video
Changes input connector assignment.
Makes the video settings.
Rename
Source Level
Sets the audio input mode and decode mode.
Changes the display name for this source.
Adjusts the playback level of the audio input.
Makes settings for iPod, USB memory device or network source playback.
Makes settings for still picture playback.
Displayed items of the “Input Setup”
menu differs, depending on the
selected input source.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Examples of menu and front display
Below we describe typical examples of displays on the TV screen and on the set’s display window.
Menu display
Front display
Description
q The menu items are displayed here.
w The selected line is displayed here.
MENU
Top menu display
q
Audio/Video Adjust
w
The currently selected item is displayed on the display.
Use uito move to the item you want to set.
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup
*MENU
A/V Adjust
–
w
Adjust various audio and video parameters
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
Display when changing settings
Default
[
HDMI
]
[
DIGITAL
]
[
COMP
]
BD
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
q
None
*Input Assign
BD
q Use uiopto move to the item you want to set.
w Press ENTER to set to the mode in which the setting can be made.
Opt1
None
[HDMI1 ]q
w
Select
ENTER Enter
RETURN Return
Change HDMI input connector assignment
Press ENTER.
Press ENTER.
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
e “0” and “1” is displayed at the sides of item whose setting can be
Default
[
HDMI
]
[
DIGITAL
]
[
COMP
]
*Input Assign
BD
BD
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
changed. Use opto change to the desired setting.
•HDMI1 –e
DVD e
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
None
Opt1
None
Select
Assign HDMI
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
1
input connector
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
q When opis pressed, the cursor moves to the left or right.
w When uiis pressed at the position where you want to input the
character, the character is input.
Display when inputting characters
Display when resetting
q
DVD
Default
DVD
*Rename:DVD
•DVD
–
w
q
For inputting characters on a keyboard screen or with the number buttons
on the remote control unit, see page 65.
Input
SHIFT a/A
ENTER Enter
SEARCH Keyboard
RETURN Cancel
q Press ito select “Default”, then press ENTER to set.
w Press oto select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
*Rename
Default
q
DVD
Default
DVD
q
Press ENTER.
ENTER Enter
RETURN Return
*Rename
Default? :•No
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Inputting characters
You can change the names as desired using the “Preset Name”
(vpage68),“Rename”(vpage71),“RhapsodyAccount”(vpage83),
“Napster Account” (vpage 83), “Zone Rename” (vpage 85) and
character input for the network functions.
GAccount input / Search by text / Proxy Name /
Keyboard screen
Friendly Name EditH
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP OTHER
FRIENDLY NAME EDIT
nDisplay of a keyboard input screen
For inputting characters, there are three methods, as shown below.
GRename / Zone RenameH
Edit
marantz:[AV7005]
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
Method for inputting characters
Default
q
w
Method
Operations
• Operating with the remote control unit
or the main unit.
• Use uio p and ENTER to input
characters.
BD
BD
q
w
Using the cursor buttons
(Normal screen)
A
N
0
$
B
C
P
D
Q
3
’
E
R
4
(
F
S
5
)
G
T
H
U
7
I
J
K
X
!
L
Y
”
M
Z
O
1
%
V
8
,
W
9
;
2
&
6
#
e
z
+
<
=
>
Input
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
DELETE Delete
• Operating with the remote control unit.
• Select a character on the TV screen to
input characters.
Using the keyboard
screen
SEARCH Keyboard INSERT Insert
Clear
Space
0
1
O
K
r
t
y
u
i
q Character input section
w Guide for operation buttons
Select
SHIFT a/A
ENTER Input
SEARCH Normal
RETURN Cancel
Normal screen
Using the cursor buttons
GAccount input / Search by text / Proxy Name /
nDisplay of a normal input screen
Friendly Name EditH
Display the screen for inputting characters
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP OTHER
FRIENDLY NAME EDIT
GRename / Zone RenameH
1 (vpage 63 “Menu map”).
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
Use opto set the cursor to the character you want
Edi
marantz:[AV7005]
q
w
2 to change.
DVD
DVD
q
w
a
n
0
_
b
o
1
/
c
p
2
:
d
q
3
˜
e
r
f
g
t
h
u
7
]
i
j
k
x
.
l
m
z
-
}
s
5
[
v
8
^
w
9
ˋ
y
@
|
Use uito change the character,
e
Default
4
?
6
\
3 then press ENTER.
{
• The types of characters that can be input
are as shown below.
Clear
Space
0
1
Ins
Del
O K
r
t
u
i
y
o
Q
RETURN Cancel
Select
SHIFT a/A
ENTER Input
SEARCH Normal
GUpper case charactersH
Input
SHIFT a/A
ENTER Enter
RETURN Cancel
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
GLower case charactersH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
SEARCH Keyboard
q Character input section
w Cursor
GSymbolsH ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
+ , - . / : ; <
z
e Keyboard section
r Clear key
t Space key
y Cursor keys
u OK key
= > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜
GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space)
• The input character type can be switched by pressing SHIFT/TOP
MENU while the display name is being changed.
i Guide for operation buttons
o Insert key
Q Delete key
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the name then press
4 ENTER to register it.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Inputting characters
Input Setup
Display the screen for inputting characters
Perform settings related to input source playback.
• You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
1 (vpage 63 “Menu map”).
Menu operation
Press SEARCH/INFO while a normal screen is
2 displayed.
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation
A keyboard screen is displayed.
1 mode.
Select a character to be changed.
Press MENU.
3 qPress uio p to select
2 The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
or
.
Use uito select the menu to be set or operated.
wPress ENTER to place the
3
4
cursor at the character to be
changed.
Each time ENTER is pressed, the
cursor moves by one character.
Press ENTER or pto enter the setting.
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN.
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Select a character to be input with uio p then
4 press ENTER.
• The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
GUpper case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789
Important information
nAbout the display of input sources
! “ # $ % & ’ ( )
+ , ; < = >
z
In this section, the configurable input sources for each item are shown as follows.
GLower case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
BD
DVD VCR SAT
M-XPort
GAME
AUX1
NET/USB
TV
CD
CDR PHONO
SIRIUS
HD Radio
. @ - _ / : ˜ ? [ \ ] ^ ` { | }
NOTE
• The input character type can be switched by pressing SHIFT/TOP
MENU while the display name is being changed.
Input sources that have been set to “Delete” at “Source Delete” (vpage 84) cannot be selected.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the name.
5
6
Use uiopto select
, then press ENTER.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
66
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Input Setup
Items that can be set with the Input Setup procedure
Auto Preset
Auto Preset (vpage 67)
Preset Skip (vpage 67)
Parental Lock (vpage 67)
Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.
INPUT SETUP
AUTO PRESET
INPUT SETUP
INPUT SETUP
PRESET SKIP
PARENTAL LOCK
[1/7]
Setting items
Start
Start the auto preset
process.
Setting details
Block
Block Presets
A
Start
A
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Lock Setting
A1 FM 87.50MHz
A2 FM 87.90MHz
A3 FM 89.10MHz
A4 FM 93.30MHz
A5 FM 97.90MHz
A6 AM 98.10MHz
A7 AM 98.90MHz
A8 AM 100.10MHz
Edit Lock Code
If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired
station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.
HD Radio
ENTER Enter
Start the auto preset process
RETURN Return
RETURN Return
Change memory blocks
Set a listening limit to any channel
Antenna Aiming (vpage 68)
Preset Name (vpage 68)
Input Assign (vpage 68)
Preset Skip
Default settings are underlined.
INPUT SETUP
INPUT SETUP
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
ANTENNA AIMING
PRESET NAME
[1/7]
Set preset channel to be skipped when selecting.
Default
[
HDMI
]
[ DIGITAL ]
[
COMP
]
Block
A
[
Satellite
A1 FM 87.50MHz
A2 FM 87.90MHz
A3 FM 89.10MHz
A4 FM 93.30MHz
A5 FM 97.90MHz
A6 AM 98.10MHz
A7 AM 98.90MHz
A8 AM 100.10MHz
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
BD
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
[
Setting items
Setting details
1 – 8 : Set by individual preset channels in the currently selected preset
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
Terrestrial
[
[
[
A – G
[
None
[
Set the preset channels you memory block.
do not want to display. You • ON : Display the selected preset channel.
Opt1
None
[
RETURN Return
RETURN Return
Select
ENTER Enter
RETURN Return
can set by preset memory
block (A to G) or by preset
channel (1 to 8).
• Skip : Do not display the selected preset channel.
Adjust antenna position for best signal
Change memory blocks
Change HDMI input connector assignment
If you set “Block Presets” to “Skip”, you can skip the preset memory
blocks (A to G).
Video (vpage 69)
Input Mode (vpage 71)
Rename (vpage 71)
INPUT SETUP
INPUT SETUP
INPUT SETUP
VIDEO
INPUT MODE
RENAME
SIRIUS HD Radio
Video Select
Source
Auto
Input Mode
Decode Mode
Auto
Auto
DVD
DVD
Video Mode
Video Convert
i/p Scaler
ON
Default
Analog & HDMI
Auto
Resolution(Analog)
Resolution(HDMI)
Progressive Mode
Aspect
Parental Lock
Default settings are underlined.
Auto
Auto
Full
For any channel, set the radio reception limits.
RETURN Return
RETURN Return
RETURN Return
Select desired video input source
Automatically detect input signal and playback
Setting items
Setting details
Source Level (vpage 71)
Playback Mode (vpage 71)
Still Picture (vpage 72)
Lock Setting
Set the channel radio
reception limits.
1. Press uito select “Lock Setting”, and then press por ENTER.
2. Pressing uio p, input the password (4 digits number) and press
ENTER.
INPUT SETUP
INPUT SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SOURCE LEVEL
PLAYBACK MODE
STILL PICTURE
Analog Input
Digital Input
0dB
0dB
Repeat
OFF
OFF
Slide Show
Interval
OFF
5sec
Random
3. Select channel by pressing ui, and set the lock by pressing op.
Unlock : Do not lock selected channel(s).
SIRIUS
Lock : Lock selected channel(s). When a Parental Locked channel is
tuned, “Enter Lock Code” is displayed, then input the password.
RETURN Return
Compensate analog audio input playback level
RETURN Return
RETURN Return
Cancel repeat mode
Display only the selected still picture image
• The default password is “0000”.
• If the password is wrong, “Lock Code is incorrect” is displayed. Input
the correct password.
• While listening to the channel being played, you can also set parental
lock (vpage 32).
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
67
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Input Setup
Setting items
Setting details
Input Assign
Edit Lock Code
Change the password.
1. Press uito select “Edit Lock Code”, and then press por ENTER.
2. Input current lock code (4 digits) using uiop, and press ENTER.
3. Input new lock code (4 digits) using uiop, and press ENTER.
4. Input new lock code (4 digits) again using uiop, and press ENTER.
5. Press uito select “Execute”, and then press ENTER.
If the correct password is input, “Completed” is displayed, and the new
password is modified.
Examples of input assign menu screen displays
SIRIUS
q Input Source
w HDMI input
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
e Digital audio input
r Component video input
Default
[
HDMI
]
[ DIGITAL ]
[
COMP
]
BD
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
• If the old password is incorrectly input, “Current Lock Code is incorrect”
is displayed, and proceed again from step 1.
• If the password input is 3 digits or less, “Enter 4 digits number” is
displayed, and input again with a 4 digit password.
q
None
Opt1
None
• If the new password is not correctly input, “New Lock Codes do not
Match” is displayed and the password does not change.
Select
ENTER Ente
RETURN urn
Change HDMI inwput connector asesignment
r
Antenna Aiming
Install the antenna with radio reception sensitivity set to maximum.
Setting items Setting details
Satellite
Input assignments menu operations
Use uiopto move the highlight to the item you want to set.
1
Display
Condition
Signal strength is excellent
Indicate satellite signal
strength.
Press ENTER, then use opto select the input connector to be
¡¡¡
¡¡
¡
2 assigned.
Signal strength is good
Signal strength is weak
No signal
SIRIUS
Press ENTER to register the setting.
Terrestrial
Indicate terrestrial signal
strength.
3
NOTE
SIRIUS
If all “HDMI”, “Digital” and “Component” assignment of the Game source are set to “None”, Game
source cannot be selected with the input source selection.
Preset Name
Assign name to a preset memory.
Setting items
Setting details
A1 – G8
Select the preset channel.
• Up to eight characters can be input.
• For character input, see page 65.
HD Radio
Default
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
The changed preset name
is returned to the default
setting.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
68
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Input Setup
Setting items
Setting details
HDMI 1 / HDMI 2 / HDMI 3 / HDMI 4 / HDMI 5 / HDMI 6
Set this to change the HDMI None : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input
Setting items
Setting details
1-RCA / 2-RCA / 3-RCA / 4-RCA (Component video)
None : Do not assign a component video input connector to the selected
HDMI
Component
Set this to change the
component video input
connectors assigned to the
input sources.
input connectors assigned
to the input sources.
source.
input source.
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
BD
SAT
TV
DVD
VCR
BD
SAT
TV
DVD
VCR
Input
source
Input
source
GAME AUX1
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
GAME AUX1
Default
setting
HDMI
3
HDMI
5
HDMI
6
Default
setting
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 4
None
1-RCA 2-RCA 4-RCA 3-RCA
None
None
None
An input source to which an component video input connector cannot be
assigned is displayed as “– – –”.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• An input source to which an HDMI input connector cannot be assigned
is displayed as “– – –”.
• To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign“ – “Digital”, select “Digital” at “Input
Mode” (vpage 71).
Default
The “Input Assign” settings No : Do not reset to the defaults.
are returned to the default
settings.
If you select “Default” and press ENTER, the message “Default
Setting?” is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then press ENTER.
• The audio signals input from the analog and digital connectors are not
output to the monitor.
• When“HDMIControl”(vpage80)issetto“ON”,HDMIinputconnector
cannot be assigned to “TV”.
Coax1 – 2 (COAXIAL) / Opt1 – 3 (OPTICAL)
Video
Default settings are underlined.
Digital
Set this to change the digital None : Do not assign a digital input connector to the selected input source.
Set the source video.
input connectors assigned
z “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 69) or “Component” (vpage 69) has been
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
to the input sources.
assigned.
shown below.
BD
SAT
DVD
GAME AUX1
CD CDR
VCR
Setting items
Video Select
Video of another input
source is played back
combined with the playing
audio.
Setting details
Input source
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
Source : Play the picture and sound of the input source.
BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / TV : Select video input source to
view. This can be set for individual input sources.
Default
setting
Coax
1
Coax
2
Opt
3
TV
None
None
None
SIRIUS
“GAME” and “TV” can be selected only when a component video is
assigned as an input source.
Input source
TV
CD
CDR
SIRIUS
Default
setting
Opt
1
Opt
2
NOTE
None
None
• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected
at “Source Delete” (vpage 84) cannot be
selected.
• This can also be set by pressing V.SEL on the
remote control unit.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
69
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Input Setup
Setting items
Setting details
Setting items
Setting details
Video Mode
Make settings for video
processing.
Auto : Process video automatically based on the HDMI content
information.
Movie : Process video normally.
Resolution
Auto : The number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI output
connector supports is detected automatically and the appropriate output
resolution is set.
Set the output resolution.
Resolution (Analog) :
Analog Video
Game : Always process video appropriate for game content.
480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz : Set the output resolution.
BD
SAT
DVD
GAME
TV
VCR
Resolution (HDMI) : HDMI
z
z
• If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the
input contents.
• If a source is played in both MAIN ZONE (audio and video) and ZONE2
(audio only) modes in the same room, audio in MAIN ZONE and ZONE2
modes may sound out of synchronization, but this is not malfunction. In
this case, setting to “Game” mode may improve audio synchronization.
• This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
• When “i/p Scaler” is set to ”Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the
analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set.
• To watch 1080p/24Hz pictures, use a TV that supports 1080p/24Hz video
signals.
BD
DVD
VCR
AUX1
z
SAT
GAME
AUX1 NET/USB
z
TV
• When set to “1080p/24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film
sources (in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend
setting the resolution to “1080p”.
• It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output
at a resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
Auto : The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate
mode is set.
Video1 : Select mode suitable for video playback
Video2 : Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film material
playback.
Video Convert
ON : The input video signal is converted.
OFF : The input video signal is not converted.
The input video signal is
converted automatically
in conjunction with the
connected TV (vpage 14
“Converting input video
signals for output (Video
conversion function)”).
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other
source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this
case set “Video Convert” to “OFF”.
• When “Video Convert” is set to “OFF”, the video conversion function
does not work. In this case, connect this unit and TV with the same type
of cable.
Progressive Mode
Set an appropriate
progressive conversion
mode for the source video
signal.
BD
SAT
DVD
GAME
TV
VCR
z
z
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
BD
SAT
DVD
GAME
TV
VCR
AUX1
z
z
i/p Scaler
Analog : Use i/p scaler function for analog video signal.
Analog & HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.
HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video signal.
OFF : Do not use i/p scaler function.
AUX1
Convert the input source’s
resolution to the resolution
set at “Resolution”.
Aspect
Full : Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
Normal : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio.
Set the aspect ratio for the
video signals output to the
HDMI.
“Aspect” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
BD
DVD
VCR
• “Analog & HDMI” and “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an
HDMI input connector is assigned.
• Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each
input connector.
• This function is not effective when the input signal is x.v.Color, 3D,
sYCC 601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC 601 color or computer
resolution.
z
SAT
GAME
BD
DVD
VCR
AUX1 NET/USB
z
z
SAT
GAME
TV
AUX1 NET/USB
z
TV
z “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 69) or “Component” (vpage 69) has been
assigned.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
70
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Input Setup
Input Mode
Default settings are underlined.
Rename
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input source.
Change the display name of the selected input source.
Setting items
Input Mode
Set the audio input modes
for the different input
sources.
Setting details
Setting items
Setting details
• Up to eight characters can be input.
Auto : Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.
HDMI : Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital : Play only signals from digital input.
Analog : Play only signals from analog input.
7.1CH IN : Only signals input from the 7.1CH INPUT terminal will be
played back.
Rename
Change the display name of • For character input, see page 65.
the selected input source.
Default
The input source name
is returned to the default
setting.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
• This can also be set by pressing A/D on the
remote control unit.
• Each time A/D is pressed, the setting is changed
as shown below.
Source Level
Default settings are underlined.
• This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.
• Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.
Auto
HDMI
Digital
Analog
Setting details
7.1CH IN
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
• “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” is assigned at
“Input Assign” (vpage 69).
• “Digital” can be set for input sources for which “Digital” is assigned at
“Input Assign” (vpage 69).
The analog input level and digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for
which “HDMI” or “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign“ (vpage 68).
• If the input source is set to “TV” or “Game”, it cannot be set to “Analog”.
Playback Mode
Make settings for repeat playback mode or random playback mode.
• When digital signals are properly input, the
indicator lights on
the display. If the indicator does not light, check the digital input
connector assignment and the connections.
• The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
• If “HDMI Control” is set to “ON” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI OUT connectors, the input mode whose input
source is “TV” is fixed to ARC.
Auto : Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play automatically.
PCM : Decode and play only PCM input signals.
Setting items
Repeat
Make settings for repeat
mode.
Setting details
All : All files are played repeatedly.
One : A file being played is played repeatedly.
OFF : Repeat playback mode is canceled.
Decode Mode
NET/USB
Set the decode mode for
input source.
DTS : Decode and play only DTS input signals.
Random
ON : Enable random playback.
Make random mode
settings.
OFF : Disable random playback.
BD
SAT
TV
DVD
GAME AUX1
CD CDR
VCR
• This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” is
assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage 68).
• Normally set this mode to “Auto”. Set “PCM” and “DTS” when
inputting the corresponding input signal.
NET/USB
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
71
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
Input Setup
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Audio/Video Adjust
The sound being played in the surround mode can be adjusted to your liking.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set
surround mode. For details on the adjustable parameters, see “Surround modes and parameters”
(vpage 104).
Still Picture
Make settings for playing back still picture images.
Default settings are underlined.
Setting items
Setting details
Slide Show
Make slide show settings.
ON : Display still picture images in a slide show.
OFF : Display only the selected still picture image.
Menu operation
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation
NET/USB
1 mode.
Interval
Set the playback time per
image.
5sec – 60sec
Press MENU.
2 The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
NET/USB
Use uito select the menu to be set or operated.
3
4
Press ENTER or pto enter the setting.
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN.
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the Audio/Video Adjust procedure
Audio Adjust (vpage 73)
n Surround Parameter (vpage 73)
n Tone (vpage 73)
n Audyssey Settings (vpage 74)
n A-DSX Soundstage (vpage 75)
n Manual EQ (vpage 76)
n M-DAX (vpage 76)
n Audio Delay (vpage 76)
Picture Adjust (vpage 77)
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Audio/Video Adjust
Setting items
Height Gain
Control the front height Mid : Front height channel sound is output with standard sound volume.
Setting details
Audio Adjust
Low : Reduce the front height channel volume.
Default settings are underlined.
nSurround Parameter
channel volume.
High : Increase the front height channel volume.
Adjust surround sound parameters. It may not be possible to set this item depending on the input
signal.
NOTE
“Height Gain” is displayed for the following settings.
• When “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.
• When the “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” setting (vpage 78) is set
other than to “None”.
• When surround mode is “PLgz” or the PLgz decoder is used.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
Setting items
Setting details
HT-EQ
ON : “HT-EQ” is used.
OFF : “HT-EQ” is not used.
Soften the treble range
of movie soundtracks for
better understanding.
Default
DRC
Auto : Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to
source. This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.
Low / Mid / High : These set the compression level.
OFF : Dynamic range compression always off.
The “Surround Parameter” No : Do not reset to the defaults.
settings are returned to the
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud
and soft sounds).
default settings.
D.Comp
Low / Mid / High : These set the compression level.
OFF : Turn dynamic range compression off.
nTone
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud
and soft sounds).
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
Setting items
Tone Control
Set the tone control function OFF : Playback without tone adjustment.
Setting details
ON : Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
LFE
–10dB – 0dB
Adjust the low-frequency
effects level (LFE).
For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting
to the values below.
• Dolby Digital sources : “0dB”
to ON and OFF.
“Tone Control” can be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to
“OFF”.
• DTS movie sources : “0dB”
• DTS music sources : “–10dB”
0.0 – 1.0 (0.3)
NOTE
C.Image
• “Tone Control” settings are not reflected to ZONE2 and ZONE3.
• The tone cannot be adjusted in the direct mode.
–6dB – +6dB
Assign center channel
signal to front left and right
channels for wider sound.
Bass
Adjust low frequency range
(bass).
Treble
Panorama
ON : Set.
“Bass” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.
–6dB – +6dB
Assign front L/R signal also OFF : Do not set.
to surround channels for
Adjust high frequency range
(treble).
wider sound.
Dimension
Shift sound image center
to front or rear to adjust
playback balance.
“Treble” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.
0 – 6 (3)
0 – 7 (3)
C.Width
Assign center channel
signal to front left and right
channels for wider sound.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
73
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Audio/Video Adjust
Setting items
Setting details
Default settings are underlined.
nAudyssey Settings
®
®
®
®
®
Dynamic EQ
ON : Use Dynamic EQ.
OFF : Do not use Dynamic EQ.
Set MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume . These can be selected after Audyssey Auto
Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see page 109.
Solve the problem of
deteriorating sound quality
as volume is decreased
by taking into account
human perception and
room acoustics. Works with
MultEQ XT.
NOTE
•
is displayed when set to “ON”.
If you have not performed Auto Setup, or if you change the speaker settings after performing Auto Setup,
you may not be able to select Dynamic EQ/Dynamic Volume, and “Run Audyssey” may be displayed.
In this case, either perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again or perform “Restore” (vpage 12) to return to
the settings after Audyssey Auto Setup was run.
• Buttons on the remote control unit or main unit
can be used for operations.
Press DYN EQ/VOL.
Setting items
MultEQ XT
Select one equalizer from
three modes. MultEQ XT
corrects both time and
frequency response
Setting details
Each time DYN EQ/VOL is pressed, the setting is
changed as shown below.
Audyssey : Optimize the frequency response of all speakers.
Audyssey Byp.L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except
front L and R speakers.
Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat
response.
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Medium
Dynamic Volume : Heavy
problems in the listening
area based on Audyssey
Auto Setup calibration. We
recommend “Audyssey”.
MultEQ XT is the
prerequisite function for
Dynamic EQ and Dynamic
Volume.
Manual : Apply frequency response set with “Manual EQ” (vpage 76).
OFF : Turn “MultEQ XT” equalizer off.
Dynamic EQ : OFF
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Light
Reference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is
referenced to the standard
film mix level. It makes
adjustments to maintain
the reference response
and surround envelopment
when the volume is turned
0dB (Film Ref) : This is the default setting and should be used when
listening to movies.
5dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range,
such as classical music.
10dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic
range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
• “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be
selected after Audyssey Auto Setup has been performed. “Audyssey”
is automatically selected after performing Audyssey Auto Setup. When
“Audyssey”, “AudysseyByp. L/R”or“AudysseyFlat”isselected,
illuminates.
• After running Audyssey Auto Setup, if the
Speaker Configuration, Distance, Channel
Level, and Crossover Frequency have changed
without increasing the number of speakers
15dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material
down from 0 dB. However, that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic
film reference level is not
always used in music or
other non-film content.
Dynamic EQ Reference
Level Offset provides three
offsets from the film level
reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB) that can be selected
when the mix level of the
content is not within the
standard.
range.
measured, only
illuminates.
Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” (vpage 74).
• Pressing MULTEQ makes this setting.
NOTE
• “MultEQ XT” and “Manual” cannot be selected when “EQ Customize”
is set to “Not Used” (vpage 81).
• When using headphones, “MultEQ XT” is automatically set to “OFF”.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
74
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Audio/Video Adjust
Setting items
Setting details
Heavy : Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.
Medium : Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.
Light : Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
OFF : Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.
Setting items
Stage Width
Adjust sound stage width
when using front wide
speakers.
Setting details
®
Dynamic Volume
–10 – +10 (0)
–10 – +10 (0)
Solve the problem of large
variations in volume level
between TV, movies and
other content (between
quiet passages and
loud passages, etc.) by
automatically adjusting to
the user’s preferred volume
setting.
Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height
when using front height
speakers.
•
is displayed when set to “ON”.
• “Audyssey DSX” can be set when you are using front height speakers
or front wide speakers.
• “Audyssey DSX” is only valid when using a center speaker.
• “Audyssey DSX” is only enabled when the listening mode is set other
than STEREO, PLgz Height, MULTI CH STEREO, NEURAL, DOLBY VS,
DIRECT, PURE DIRECT.
• “A-DSX Soundstage” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being
played includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the
respective channels are played back using the input signals.
• If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in Auto
Setup (vpage 11), the setting is automatically
changed to “Heavy”.
• Buttons on the remote control unit or main unit
can be used for operations.
Press DYN EQ/VOL.
Each time DYN EQ/VOL is pressed, the setting is
changed as shown below.
About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Heavy
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Medium
Audyssey DSX is a scalable surround expansion system that adds
new channels to improve the surround impression. Based on research
in human hearing Audyssey DSX adds a pair of Wide channels in the
front because that information is critical in the rendering of a realistic
soundstage.
Dynamic EQ : OFF
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Light
Audyssey DSX then adds a pair of Height channels above the main
front channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and
perceptual cues related to soundstage depth. In addition to creating
these new channels, Audyssey DSX applies Surround Envelopment
Processing to enhance the blend between the front and side/back
surround channels. The result is a much more seamless and enveloping
home theater experience.
Default settings are underlined.
nA-DSX Soundstage
Adjust Audyssey DSX™ setting and sound stage parameters.
Setting items
Audyssey DSX
Provides more immersive
surround sound by adding
the new channels.
Setting details
ON-Height- : Turn on A-DSX processing for height
expansion.
ON-Wide- : Turn on A-DSX processing for wide
expansion.
OFF : Do not set Audyssey DSX.
• This can also be set by pressing A-DSX.
• The
indicator illuminates on the display.
Audyssey DSX : ON -Height-
OFF
Audyssey DSX : ON -Wide-
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
75
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Audio/Video Adjust
Default settings are underlined.
Default settings are underlined.
nManual EQ
nM-DAX
Use the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the
amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The M-DAX
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near
those of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to
obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals.
“Manual EQ” can be set when “MultEQ XT” setting (vpage 74) is “Manual”
Setting items
Adjust CH
Correct the tone of each
speaker.
Setting details
q Select the speaker tone adjustment method.
All : Adjust the tone of all speakers together.
L/R : Adjust the tone of left and right speakers together.
Each : Adjust the tone of each speaker.
w Select the speaker.
e Select the adjustment frequency band.
63Hz / 125Hz / 250Hz / 500Hz / 1kHz / 2kHz / 4kHz / 8kHz / 16kHz
• Select the speakers you want to adjust when “L/R” or “Each” is
selected.
Setting details
OFF : Do not use M-DAX.
LOW : Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs.
MID : Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources.
HIGH : Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs.
• This item can be set with analog signals or when a PCM signal (fs = 44.1/48
kHz) is input.
• This cannot be set when the surround mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
r Adjust the level.
–20.0dB – +6.0dB (0.0dB)
Yes : Copy.
Base Curve Copy
Copy “Audyssey Flat” curve No : Do not copy.
• This item default setting is “OFF”.
®
from MultEQ XT.
®
• If a setting other than “OFF” is selected, the M-DAX indicator lights.
• Pressing M-DAX on the remote control unit or the main unit makes this setting.
“Base Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup has
been performed.
Default
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
OFF
LOW
MID
The “Manual EQ” settings
are returned to the default
settings.
HIGH
Default settings are underlined.
nAudio Delay
While viewing video, manually adjust the time to delay audio output.
Setting details
0ms – 200ms
• This item can be set within the range of 0 to 100 ms when “Auto Lip Sync” is set to “ON” and when
a TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync is connected.
• Store “Audio Delay” for each input source.
• Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” (vpage 70) is set
to “Auto” or “Game”.
• This can also be set by pressing A.DELAY on the remote control unit.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
76
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Audio/Video Adjust
Manual Setup
®
Set when changing Audyssey Auto Setup settings, or when changing the audio, video, display
or other settings.
Picture Adjust
• This item can be set when the input source is BD
Default settings are underlined.
DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 NET/USB TV
• With input sources other than the ones above, this item can be set when “Video Select” is selected. In
this case, the original input source settings are called out.
.
• If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible
®
®
®
to set MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume (vpage 74, 75).
• Can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
• Can be set when the “Video Convert” setting (vpage 70) is “ON”.
• “GAME”or“TV”canbesetwhen“HDMI”(vpage69)or“Component”(vpage69)hasbeenassigned.
Menu operation
Setting items
Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.
Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
Chroma Level
Adjust picture chroma level
(saturation).
Hue
Adjust color hue.
Setting details
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation
–6 – +6 (0)
0 – +12
1 mode.
Press MENU.
2 The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
–6 – +6 (0)
Press uito select the menu to be set or operated.
3
4
–6 – +6 (0)
Press ENTER or pto enter the setting.
DNR
OFF / Low / Mid / High
Reduce overall picture
noise.
Enhancer
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN.
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
0 – +12
Emphasize picture contours.
Items that can be set with the Manual Setup procedure
Speaker Setup (vpage 78)
HDMI Setup (vpage 80)
Audio Setup (vpage 81)
• “DNR” and “Enhancer” are each effective with HDMI output.
• The value set at “Picture Adjust” is stored in the memory individually for each input source.
MANUAL SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
HDMI SETUP
AUDIO SETUP
Amp Assign
RGB Range
Normal
ON
7.1ch IN SW Level
EQ Customize
Speaker Config.
Bass Setting
Auto Lip Sync
HDMI Audio Out
Monitor Out
AMP
Distance
Monitor 1
ON
Channel Level
Crossover Frequency
HDMI Control
Standby Source
Power Off Control
Last
All
RETURN Return
Assign surround back AMP for other use
Use video range from 16 (black) to 235 (white)
Set subwoofer playback level in 7.1ch IN mode
Network Setup (vpage 81)
Zone Setup (vpage 83)
Option Setup (vpage 84)
MANUAL SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
NETWORK SETUP
ZONE SETUP
OPTION SETUP
Network Connecting
Other
ZONE2 Setup
ZONE3 Setup
Volume Control
Source Delete
GUI
Rhapsody Account
Napster Account
Network Information
Component 2 Output
Zone Rename
Trigger Out
Display
Setup Lock
Make settings for wired LAN
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2
Make settings for volume control
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
77
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Setting items
Setting details
Speaker Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
Surround : Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey Auto Setup.
• If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible to select
MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume (vpage 74, 75).
• Manual Setup can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
• None : Select when the surround speakers are not connected.
nAudio output from each PRE OUT terminal
PRE OUT Channel
• When “Surround” is set to “Large”, “S.Back”, “F.Height” and “F.Wide”
can be set to “Large”.
• When “Surround” is set to “None”, “S.Back”, “F.Height” and “F.Wide”
can automatically set to “None”.
UNBALANCED PRE
FL/FR
FL/FR
C
C
SW1/SW2
SW1/SW2
SL/SR
SL/SR
SBL/SBR
HL/HR
---
WL/WR
---
OUT terminal
BALANCED PRE
OUT terminal
SBL/SBR
Subwoofer 1 /
Subwoofer 2
Surround
Back*
Front Height /
Front B
S.Back : Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
Audio Output
Front A Center
Surround
Front Wide
*The output audio differs depending on the “Amp Assign” settings.
Setting items Setting details
Amp Assign Normal : Set when using surround back, front height or front wide
• None : Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.
Set the speakers connected speakers.
• 2spkrs : Use two surround back speakers.
• 1spkr : Use only one surround back speaker. When you select this
setting, connect the surround back speaker to the left (L) channel.
to the UNBALANCED and
ZONE2 : Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE2.
BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/ ZONE3 : Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE3.
SBR terminals of the power SPKR-C : Set for connecting the tweeter of the front speaker to the
amp.
UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of the
power amp, and the woofer of the front speaker to the FL/FR terminals.
Front : Set the front speaker size.
Even when the “S.Back“ setting is other than “None”, sound may
not be emitted from the surround back speaker, depending on the
playback source.
Speaker Config.
Select speaker configuration • Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
NOTE
and size (bass reproduction
capability).
frequencies.
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you
cannot make the “S.Back” setting.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
NOTE
F.Height : Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
Do not use the outward
shape of the speaker to
determine selection of a
“Large” or “Small” speaker.
Instead, use the frequencies
set in “Crossover
Frequency” (vpage 80) as
the standard for determining
bass reproduction capability.
• When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to
“Large”.
• When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround“, “S.Back”,
“F.Height” and “F.Wide” can not be set to “Large”.
Center : Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
• None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you
cannot make the “F.Height” setting.
• None : Select when a center speaker is not connected.
“Large” is not displayed when “Front” is set to “Small”.
Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer.
• Yes : Use a subwoofer.
• No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”.
Remote control operation
Move the cursor
78
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
buttons
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Setting items
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
Setting details
Setting items
Distance
(Continued)
Setting details
F.Wide : Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
• The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign”
(vpage 78) and “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78) settings.
• Default settings :
Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L /
F.Wide R : 12.0 ft (3.6 m)
• None : Select when the front wide speakers are not connected.
Surround L / Surround R / S.Back L / S.Back R : 10.0 ft (3.0 m)
• Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20
ft (6.0 m).
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you
cannot make the “F.Wide” setting.
Bass Setting
Set subwoofer and LFE
signal range playback.
Subwoofer Mode : Select low range signals to be reproduced by
subwoofer.
• LFE : The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is
added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
• LFE+Main : The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.
NOTE
Speakerssetto“None”in“SpeakerConfig.”(vpage78)arenotdisplayed.
Default : The “Distance” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER, the “Default Setting?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER.
Test Tone Start : Output test tone.
• “Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer”
(vpage 78) is set to “Yes”.
• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest
bass.
• Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced
from the subwoofer.
Channel Level
Set the volume of the test
tone to be the same when it
• Front L / F.Height L / Center / F.Height R / Front R / F.Wide R /
z
z
Surround R / S.Back R / S.Back L / Surround L / F.Wide L /
is output from each speaker. Subwoofer : Select the speaker.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” setting (vpage 78) is set to
“1spkr”, “S.Back” is displayed.
NOTE
• –12.0dB – +12.0dB (0.0dB) : Adjust the volume.
If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”, and
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the
subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected surround mode.
LPF for LFE : Set LFE signal playback range.
• 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz
Unit : Set the unit of distance.
• Feet / Meters
Step : Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
• 1ft / 0.1ft
• When ois pressed while the subwoofer volume is set to “–12 dB”, the
“Subwoofer” setting switches to “OFF”.
• When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the
surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different
surround modes, use the operation see page 56.
Distance
Set distance from listening
position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the
distance from the listening
position to each speaker.
• When you press TEST TONE on the remote control unit, you can enter
this setting item immediately.
• 0.1m / 0.01m
NOTE
Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / Surround L / Surround R /
• Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78) settings
are not displayed.
• When a headphones jack is inserted in the PHONES jack of this unit, the
“Channel Level” is not displayed.
Default : The “Channel Level” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
z
z
S.Back L / S.Back R / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L / F.Wide R
: Select the speaker.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” setting (vpage 78) is set to
“1spkr”, “S.Back” is displayed.
• 0.0ft – 60.0ft / 0.00m – 18.00m : Set the distance.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER, the “Default Setting?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
79
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Setting items
Crossover Frequency
Set the maximum frequency • 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
Setting details
HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
Default settings are underlined.
Crossover : Set the crossover frequency.
of the bass signal output
from each channel to
the subwoofer. Set the
Crossover Frequency to
suit the bass reproduction
capability of the speaker
being used.
250Hz
Setting items
Setting details
Normal : Output with RGB video range (16 (black) to 235 (white)).
Advanced : Specify crossover frequency for each speaker.
• Front / Center / Surround / S.Back / F.Height / F.Wide : Select the
speaker.
• 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz : Set the crossover frequency.
RGB Range
Set the video range of RGB Enhanced : Output with RGB video range (0 (black) to 255 (white)).
output from the HDMI
connector.
Auto Lip Sync
This setting is active when using a TV equipped with a DVI terminal.
ON : Compensated.
Make automatic
compensation for timing
shift in audio and video
output.
OFF : Not compensated.
• “Crossover Frequency” can be set when the “Bass Setting” –
“Subwoofer Mode” (vpage 79) setting is “LFE+Main”, or when you
have a speaker that is set to “Small”.
HDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output
device.
AMP : Play back through speakers connected to this unit.
TV : Play back through TV connected to this unit.
• Always set the crossover frequency to “80Hz”. When using small
speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to
a higher frequency.
• For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency
is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
• The speakers that can be set when “Advanced” is selected differ
depending on to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting (vpage 79).
• When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.”
can be set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed
and the setting cannot be made.
When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV
audio setting (vpage 55 “HDMI control function”).
Monitor 1 : A TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal is always used.
Monitor 2 : A TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal is always used.
Monitor Out
Make settings for HDMI
monitor output.
With “Resolution” (vpage 70) not set to “Auto”, check whether
the TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under “HDMI
Information” – “HDMI Monitor 1 Information” and “HDMI Monitor 2
Information” (vpage 88).
• If set to “LFE+Main”, this setting can be made regardless of the
speaker size.
HDMI Control
ON : Use HDMI control function.
You can link operations with OFF : Do not use HDMI control function.
devices connected to HDMI
and compatible with HDMI
Control.
• When a device that is not compatible with the HDMI control function is
connected, set “HDMI Control” to “OFF”.
• Please consult the operating instructions for each connected component
to check the settings.
• Referto“HDMIcontrolfunction”(vpage55)formoreinformationabout
the HDMI control function.
NOTE
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more standby
power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is
recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
• “HDMI Control” does not work when the power to the equipment is off.
Either turn power on or set to standby.
• The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible
with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are
connected when you perform HDMI control.
• If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the
power to connected devices after the change.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
80
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Setting items
Standby Source
Sets the HDMI input source HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4 / HDMI5 / HDMI6 : Put the respective
Setting details
Network Setup
Make network settings.
Default settings are underlined.
Last : This item is set at the last-used input source.
to put into standby when
the power is on.
input source into standby.
Setting items
Setting details
“Standby Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”.
Network Connecting
Make settings for wired
LAN.
1. Connect the LAN cable (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
2. Turn on this unit (vpage 7 “Turn on power”).
This unit performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.
When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the
setting in step 3.
Power Off Control
Links the power standby
of this unit to external
equipment.
All : If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input
source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video : If power to a connected TV is turned off when the input source
is BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / TV, power to this unit is
automatically set to standby.
3. Set the IP address at the “Network Connecting”.
OFF : This unit does not link with power to a TV.
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
MANUAL SETUP NETWO
w
UP
NETWORK CONNECTING
“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”.
DHCP
OFF
DHCP
IP Address
OFF
IP Address
[192.168.100.019]
[255.255.255.000]
[000.000.000.000]
[000.000.000.000]
[000.000.000.000]
192.168.100.19
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Audio Setup
Make settings for audio playback.
Default settings are underlined.
Exit
Proxy
Exit
Detail
q
RETURN Return
r
e
ENTER Enter
Set IP address and proxy manually
RETURN Return
Set IP address manually
Setting items
Setting details
Subwoofer Level : Set playback level of subwoofer signal input from the
q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press
7.1ch IN SW Level
ENTER.
Setup playback method for 7.1CH INPUT connector.
analog signals inputted from • +10dB : This is the recommended level.
w Use opto set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then press i.
The DHCP function is disabled.
7.1CH INPUT connectors.
• +15dB / +5dB / 0dB : Select the level according to the player being used.
EQ Customize
Set so that unused equalizer • Used : Use.
settings are not displayed
when MULTEQ is pressed.
Audyssey Byp. L/R : Set when not using “Audyssey Byp. L/R” equalizer.
e Use uipto input the address and press ENTER.
• IP Address : Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255
CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255
• Not Used : Do not use.
Set so that “Audyssey Byp. L/R” settings can be made when
®
Audyssey Auto Setup is performed.
Audyssey Flat : Set when not using “Audyssey Flat” equalizer.
• Used : Use.
• Not Used : Do not use.
CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255
• Subnet Mask : When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal
adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in
the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input
255.255.255.0.
Set so that “Audyssey Flat” settings can be made when Audyssey
Auto Setup is performed.
• Default Gateway : When connected to a gateway (router), input its
IP address.
Manual : Set when not using the “Manual” equalizer.
• Used : Use.
• Primary DNS, Secondary DNS : If there is only one DNS address
indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at
“Primary DNS”. If there are two or more DNS addresses, input the
first one at “Secondary DNS”.
• Not Used : Do not use.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
81
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Setting items
Setting details
Setting items
Setting details
Network Connecting
(Continued)
Network Connecting
(Continued)
r Use ito select “Exit” and press ENTER.
r Use opto select the proxy server input method, and then press i.
Address : Select when inputting by address.
Setup is complete.
• When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy” and
press ENTER (vpage 82 “Proxy settings”).
Name : Select when inputting by domain name.
t Use uiopto input the proxy server address or domain name and
press ENTER.
When “Address” is selected in step r : Input the address
When“Name” is selected in step r : Input the domain name
• For character input, see page 65.
• If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need
to make the settings at “IP Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP
function is set to “ON” in this unit’s default settings.
• If this unit is being used connected to a network without the DHCP
function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some
knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a network
administrator.
• If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and
settings (vpage 24).
• If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP
(Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your
computer.
y Use uiopto input the proxy server port number and press ENTER.
u Use ito select “Exit” and press ENTER.
Setup is complete.
Network Standby : Set the network function on/off during standby.
• ON : Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network
compatible controller.
Other
Network function on/off
setting during standby, and
PC language setting.
• OFF : Suspend network function during standby.
Set to “ON” when using the web control function.
PC Language : Select computer environment language.
• ara / chi (smpl) / chi (trad) / cze / dan / dut / eng / fin / fre / ger / gre /
heb / hun / ita / jpn / kor / nor / pol / por / por(BR) / rus / spa / swe / tur
Friendly Name Edit : The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed
on the network. Up to 63 characters can be input. The default Friendly
Name on first use is “marantz:[AV7005]”.
• When you want to cancel the setting during IP address input, press
RETURN.
Proxy settings : Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a
proxy server.
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
NETWORK CONNECTING
• For character input, see page 65.
Default : Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default
setting.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
DHCP
ON
DHCP
ON
IP Address
[192.168.100.019]
[255.255.255.000]
[000.000.000.000]
[000.000.000.000]
[000.000.000.000]
IP Address
192.168.100.19
Subnet Mask
Default gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Exit
Proxy
Exit
w
Detail
q
ENTER Enter
Set IP address and proxy manually
RETURN Return
ENTER Enter
RETURN Return
When you select “Default” and press ENTER, the “Default Setting?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER.
Set if using proxy server
e
MANUAL SETUP NETWOUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
Proxy
Proxy
Address
Port
ON
Address
r
y
[000.000.000.000]
[00000]
t
Exit
u
RETURN Return
Proxy server is used
q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press
ENTER.
w Use uito set “Proxy” and press ENTER.
e Use opto set “Proxy” to “ON” and press i.
The proxy server is enabled.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
82
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Setting items
Setting details
Zone Setup
Set the audio to play back with multi-zone (ZONE2, ZONE3).
Default settings are underlined.
Other
Update Notification : Displays a notification message on this unit’s menu
screen when the latest firmware is released with “Firmware Update”. The
notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power
is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 24) when using this
function.
(Continued)
Setting items
Setting details
Bass
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
Adjust low frequency range
(bass).
Treble
• ON : Display update message.
• OFF : Do not display update message.
Adjust high frequency range
(treble).
HPF
Make settings for cutting
the low range to reduce
distortion in the bass.
Level Lch
Adjust the left channel
output level.
• When you press ENTER during display of the notification message,
the “Check for Update” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 86 for more
information on “Firmware Update”)
ON : The low range is attenuated.
OFF : The low range is not attenuated.
• Press RETURN to erase the notification message.
Upgrade Notification : Display a notification message on this unit’s
menu screen when downloadable firmware is released with “Add New
Feature”. The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds
when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 24)
when using this function.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The “Level Lch” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage 83) is set to
“Stereo“.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
• ON : Display upgrade message.
• OFF : Do not display upgrade message.
Level Rch
Adjust the right channel
output level.
The “Level Rch” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage 83) is set to
“Stereo“.
Stereo : Select stereo output.
Mono : Select mono output.
• When you press ENTER during display of the notification message,
the “Add New Feature” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 86 for more
information on “Add New Feature”)
• Press RETURN to erase the notification message.
Username / Password / Account Number / Merge / Clear
Channel
Set the signal output from
multi-zone.
Volume Level
Variable : Volume adjustment is enabled by main unit and remote control
Set the volume output level. unit.
–40dB (41) : Fix volume at –40 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external
Rhapsody Account
Set or change Username
and Password (vpage 42
“Listening to Rhapsody”).
• For character input, see page 65.
amplifier.
0dB (81) : Fix volume at 0 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external
amplifier.
Napster Account
Username / Password
• For character input, see page 65.
Set or change Username
and Password (vpage 39
“Listening to Napster”).
When “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”, the
“Volume Level” setting is automatically set to “Variable”.
Volume Limit
Make a setting for
maximum volume.
OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.
–20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)
Network Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / DHCP= ON/OFF / IP Address / MAC Address
• This can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage 83)
is “Variable”.
• This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage 84) is set
to “Absolute”.
Remote control operation
Move the cursor
83
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
buttons
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Setting items
Setting details
Option Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Power On Level
Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Make various other settings.
Define the volume setting
that is active when the
power is turned on.
– – – (0) : Always mute when power is turned on.
–80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
Setting items
Setting details
Volume Control
Volume Display : Set how volume is displayed.
• Relative : Display ---dB (Min), in the range –80.5 dB – 18 dB.
• Absolute : Display in the range 0 (Min) – 99.
• This can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage 83)
is “Variable”.
• This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage 84) is set
to “Absolute”.
Set the MAIN ZONE (room
where the unit is located)
volume setting.
• The “Volume Display” setting is applied also to the “Volume Limit” and
“Power On Level” display method.
• The “Volume Display” setting applies to all zones.
Volume Limit : Make a setting for maximum volume.
• OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.
Mute Level
Full : The sound is muted entirely.
–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Set the amount of
attenuation when muting
is on.
• –20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)
Power On Level : Define the volume setting that is active when the
power is turned on.
• Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
• – – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.
• –80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
Mute Level : Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
• Full : The sound is muted entirely.
• –40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
• –20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Source Delete
BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / NET/USB /
TV / CD / CDR / PHONO / SIRIUS / HD Radio /
M-XPort : Select input source that is not used.
• ON : Use this source.
Remove from the display
input sources that are not
used.
• Delete : Do not use this source.
NOTE
• Input sources being used in the various zones
cannot be deleted.
• Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected
using SOURCE SEL.
GUI
Screensaver : Make screensaver settings.
Make the settings related to • ON : The screensaver is activated during menu display, NET/USB, iPod,
displays on the TV screen.
SIRIUS or HD Radio screen display if no operation is performed for an
approximately 3-minute continuous period. When you press uiop,
the screensaver is cancelled and the screen before that screen saver
started is displayed.
• OFF : Screensaver is not activated.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
84
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Setting items
Setting details
Setting items
Setting details
GUI
(Continued)
Wall Paper : Set wallpaper to display in the background when playback
is stopped, etc.
GUI
(Continued)
TUNER : Set the tuner screen display time when the input source is
“SIRIUS” or “HD Radio”.
• Picture : Set the background to a picture (Marantz logo).
• Black : Set the background to black.
Format : Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
• NTSC : Select NTSC output.
• Always : Show display continuously.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
• PAL : Select PAL output.
iPod : Set the iPod screen display time when the input source is “NET/
USB”.
• Always : Show display continuously.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
MAIN ZONE : Use the component 2 output terminal as a monitor output
for MAIN ZONE.
“Format” can also be set by the
following procedure. However, the menu
screen is not displayed.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s A-DSX
and RETURN for at least 3 seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the
display.
2. Press opand set the video signal
format.
3. Press the main unit’s ENTER, MENU
or RETURN to complete the setting.
Component 2 Output
Set whether to use the
component 2 output
terminal as MAIN ZONE or
ZONE2.
Zone Rename
Change the display title of
each zone to one you prefer.
ZONE2 : Use the component 2 output terminal as a monitor output for
ZONE2.
• Up to 10 characters can be input.
• For character input, see page 65.
NOTE
Trigger Out
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.
Text : Display the details of operation when switching surround mode,
input mode, etc.
• ON : Turn display on.
• OFF : Turn display off.
Master Volume : Display the master volume during adjustment.
• Bottom : Display at the bottom.
• Top : Display at the top.
Select the condition for
activating Trigger Out 1/2 for
the input source, surround
mode, etc.
See “DC OUT (TRIGGER
OUT) jacks” (vpage 54) for
more information on trigger
out.
n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set
to “ON”.
n When setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to “ON” is selected.
Active for the zone set to “ON” with “When Setting for Zone”.
n When setting for HDMI monitor
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “ON” is selected.
• OFF : Turn display off.
Active when the “MAIN ZONE” set to “ON” with “When Setting
for Zone” is selected, and when the input source set to “ON” with
“When Setting for Input Source” is selected.
When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed
on movie subtitles, set to “Top”.
NET/USB : Set the NET/USB screen display time when the input source
is “NET/USB”.
• ON : Activate trigger on this mode.
• – – – : Do not activate trigger on this mode.
• Always : Show display continuously.
Default : The “Trigger Out” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
85
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Setting items
Setting details
Setting items
Firmware Update
Update the firmware of this approximately how long it will take to complete an update.
Setting details
Display
Set the display on/off
setting.
ON : Display is always on.
Check for Update : Check for firmware updates. You can also check
Display Auto OFF : Display is off except
when showing the status display.
Display OFF : Display is always off.
unit.
Start : Execute the update process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu
screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is
displayed.
When updating is complete, the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
This can also be set by pressing
DISPLAY.
Each time DISPLAY is pressed, the
setting is changed as shown below.
• If updating fails, the set automatically retries, but if updating is still not
possible, one of the messages shown below is displayed. If the display
reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment,
then update again.
ON
Display Auto Off
Display OFF
Display
Updating fail
Login failed
Server is busy
Connection fail
Download fail
Description
Setup Lock
Protect settings from
inadvertent change.
ON : Turn protection on.
OFF : Turn protection off.
Updating failed.
Failure to log into server.
Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Failure in connecting to server.
When canceling the setting, set “Setup Lock” to “OFF”.
NOTE
Downloading of the firmware has failed.
When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can no
longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you attempt
to operate related settings.
Add New Feature
Display new features that
can be downloaded to this
unit and perform an update. displayed.
When upgrading is complete, the power indicator becomes green and
Upgrade : Execute the upgrade process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu
screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is
· Menu operations
· M-DAX
· Channel Level
®
· MultEQ XT
®
®
· Dynamic Volume
· Dynamic EQ
normal status is resumed.
Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving
maintenance from a Marantz
service engineer or custom
installer.
• If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Firmware Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and
network environment, then update again.
Upgrade Status : Display a list of the additional functions provided by the
upgrade.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a Marantz serviceperson or
installer.
See the Marantz website for details about updates.
When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this
menu and updates can be carried out. If the procedure has not been
carried out, “Not Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is
needed when carrying out the procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by
pressing and holding oand RETURN for at
least 3 seconds.
Remote control operation
Move the cursor
86
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
buttons
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” and “Add New Feature”
• In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a
broadband Internet connection (vpage 24).
• Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed.
• Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/
upgrading procedure to be completed.
• Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/
upgrading is completed.
• Furthermore, updating/upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters, etc. set
for this unit.
• The following backup data may be erased after an update or upgrade.
• Internet radio preset channel
• Internet radio Recently Played data
• Username registered for Flickr Contact
• Data in Internet radio, media server and USB memory device
• If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the ON/STANDBY on the main unit for
more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update retry” appears
on the display and update restarts from the point at which update failed. If the error
continues despite this, check the network environment.
• Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be announced on
the Marantz web site each time related plans are defined.
• When usable new firmware is released with “Firmware Update” or “Add New Feature”, a notification
message is displayed on the menu screen. When you do not want to be notified, set “Update Notification”
(vpage 83) and “Upgrade Notification” (vpage 83) to “OFF”.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
87
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Information
Items
Setting details
Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.
HDMI Information
Show information about
HDMI input/output signals
and monitor.
HDMI Signal Information
• Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
Items
Setting details
Status
n MAIN ZONE
HDMI Monitor 1 Information / HDMI Monitor 2 Information
• Interface / Supported resol.
Show information about
current settings.
This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE.
The information displayed differs according to the input source.
Select Source / Name / Surround Mode / Input Mode /
Decode Mode / HDMI / Digital / Component / Video Select /
Video Mode / Content Type / Video Convert / i/p Scaler /
Resolution / Progressive Mode / Aspect etc.
“HDMI Monitor 1 Information” or “HDMI Monitor 2 Information”
displays information on the HDMI monitor currently being used.
Preset Channel
Show information about
preset channels.
A / B / C / D / E / F / G
A1 – A8 / B1 – B8 / C1 – C8 / D1 – D8 / E1 – E8 / F1 – F8 / G1 – G8
n ZONE2
This item shows information about settings for ZONE2.
Power / Select Source / Volume Level
NET/USB SIRIUS
HD Radio
n ZONE3
This item shows information about settings for ZONE3.
Power / Select Source / Volume Level
Audio Input Signal
Show information about
audio input signals.
Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode.
Signal : The input signal type.
fs : The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Format : The number of channels in the input signal (front, surround, LFE).
Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag : This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back
channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Matrix
signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals.
Dialogue normalization function
This function is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital
sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
sources.
The correction value can be checked using the STATUS.
The figure is the corrected value.
This cannot be changed.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
88
Confirm the setting
Return to previous menu
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Other settings
Remote control settings
Switches light illumination on/off
• When you connect a remote control receiver unit (purchased You can switch the lighting around the main display on or off.
separately) to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of this unit, use • The factory setting is “ON”.
the following procedure to disable the remote sensor function of
this unit.
• The remote sensor function of remote control signals is enabled by
default.
ON/STANDBY
DISPLAY
Press and hold DISPLAY on the main unit for 3 seconds.
• Carry out the same procedure if you want to change the settings
again.
STATUS
ENTER
nDisabling the sensor function of the remote
control unit
When the main unit is in standby mode, press ON/
STANDBY while holding down STATUS and ENTER on
the main unit.
“Remote Lock:ON” is shown on the display, and the infrared light
receiving function is disabled.
nEnabling the remote sensor function
When the main unit is in standby mode, press ON/
STANDBY while holding down STATUS and ENTER on
the main unit.
The infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.
NOTE
If a remote control receiver unit (purchased separately) is not
connected, do not perform this setting. If you do, you will not be able
to operate this unit using the remote control unit.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit
Registering the supplied preset codes in the remote control unit
enables you to operate devices made by other manufacturers.
Input
NOTE
Devices controllable with the remote
source Input source
select
buttons
control unit
(Operation mode)
If the mode of the remote control unit is set to other than amp-
operation mode, press AMP to switch the remote control unit to the
amp-operation mode to perform the following operations:
• For menu operation by pressing MENU
• For setting the channel level of the unit by pressing CH LVL
• For performing direct playback
of this unit
Operating AV equipment
z
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
Device registered on the BD button
Device registered on the DVD button
Device registered on the VCR button
Device registered on the SAT button
Press the input source select
z
1 button (vpage 25).
®
®
• For switching Audyssey DSX™, MultEQ XT , Dynamic EQ and
Dynamic Volume settings.
The remote control operating mode
switches as shown in the table below,
and the mode name is shown in the
remote control display.
®
z
• For using the Video Select function.
• For using the sleep timer function.
• For displaying the Source Select screen.
• For switching the M-DAX function.
• For directly selecting “AUTO” and “STEREO” of the listening
modes.
GAME
AUX1
Device registered on the GAME button
NOTE
Device registered on the AUX1 button
Press the input source select buttons once
to switch the operation mode of the remote
control unit supplied with this unit.
Press the input source select buttons twice
consecutively to switch the operation mode
of the remote control unit and input source
of this unit.
• Network function
• iPod or USB memory device connected
to the USB port
NET/USB
Operate this unit or the device whose input source is
2 switched.
z
z
TV
CD
Device registered on the TV button
Device registered on the CD button
Device registered on the CDR button
SIRIUS Satellite Radio
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for each device.
For operations of iPod and HD Radio receiver, see the following
pages.
CDR
• iPod (vpage 28)
• HD Radio receiver (vpage 34)
SIRIUS
HD Radio
M-XPort
HD Radio receiver
Device registered on the M-XP button
z If a preset code is registered for this button, the remote control
unit of this unit can control another devices.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Registering preset codes
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit,
it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD
players or TVs made by different manufacturers.
wScanning the code table
Registering preset codes
The following two methods can be used for registering the reset
Switch the power on of the device
code.
1 for which you want to set the
NOTE
q Entering a 4-digit code
w Scanning the code table
preset code.
• No preset codes other than BD, DVD, TV, SAT and CD can be
registered.
• In the factory settings, remote control codes for all Marantz products
are registered.
Press and hold down the input
qEntering a 4-digit code
2 source select buttons for the
See the preset code list table for the code to be input.
appliance to control, and press
nButtons used for operating the devices
q SOURCE ON/OFF
For switching power of each device on or off.
w uiop, ENTER
Press and hold down the input
SET until indicator blinks
1 source select buttons for the
twice.
The back light flashes.
appliance to control, and press
SET until indicator blinks
For menu operation of each device.
e MENU, SETUP, TOP MENU
For displaying the menu of each device.
r 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9
t Number button (0 – 9, +10)
y PRESET +, PRESET –
Aim the remote control at the
twice.
3 appliance and slowly alternate
The back light flashes.
between pressing INPUT d
Press the 4-digit code for the
and SOURCE ON/OFF for the
2 appliance using the numeric
appliance.
u TV POWER, TV INPUT
buttons (code table at the end of
The preset code is shown in the remote
control display.
For operating a TV.
this book).
This button is enabled in any mode.
• The 4-digit code is shown in the remote
control display.
Stop when the appliance turns off.
For details on operation with the remote control unit, see pages
28 – 43, 92.
4
5
• When the settings are complete, “OK”
is shown in the remote control display.
Press ENTER once to lock in the code.
• If “NG” is displayed in the remote control
display, repeat steps 1 and 2, and enter the
same code again.
Check the registered preset code
Press and hold down the
1 input source select buttons for
appliance to control, and press
SET until indicator blinks twice
and back light flashes.
The back light flashes.
Press SEARCH/INFO.
2 The
display flashes twice, after which
the set code is shown for 3 seconds in
the remote control display.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Registering preset codes
Operating components
Default settings for preset codes
The devices shown below are registered for each input source button
as default. Settings can be changed according to the devices to be
used.
The supplied remote control unit can control a component other than
this unit.
nCD player / CD recorder operation
Operation buttons
SOURCE ON/OFF
Function
Power on/off
Switch the input source
1 (vpage 25).
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
Press and hold down the
6 7
Operate the component.
1 input source select buttons for
1
Playback
Auto search (cue)
Pause
2
appliance to control and press
8 9
• For details, refer to the component’s
operating instructions.
SET until indicator blinks
3
2
twice.
Stop
The back light flashes.
CLR
Clear the inputting
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
nBlu-ray Disc player / HD-DVD player /
Enter the appropriate preset code
2 (4 digits) from the table below.
The display flashes twice.
TV POWER
TV INPUT
DVD player / DVD recorder operation
(Default : Marantz)
Operation buttons
SOURCE ON/OFF
MENU
Function
Power on/standby
(Popup) Menu
Top menu
Cursor operation
Enter
Input source
Preset
select
Category
code
5000
buttons
TOP MENU
uiop
Blu-ray Disc
player
ENTER
DVD player
Television
2000
1000
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
6 7
1
Playback
Auto search (cue)
Pause
nTV operation
Satellite set
top box
4000
3000
8 9
Operation buttons
Function
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
3
2
CD player
Stop
SOURCE ON/OFF
Select title, chapter or channel
selection
NOTE
0 – 9
CHANNEL +, –
CLR
Switch channels (up/down)
Clear the inputting
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
After this procedure, the selected source
reset to its initial code.
CLR
Clear the inputting
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
TV POWER
TV INPUT
TV POWER
TV INPUT
(Default : Marantz)
(Default : Marantz)
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Operating components
Operating learn function
nSet top box for satellite (SAT) operation
• If the AV device is not a Marantz device, or if the device does not
operate even when the preset code is registered, use the learning
function. Remote codes for different devices can be remembered
for use by the Marantz remote control included with this device.
• This remote control unit is capable of learning around 160 codes.
Press and hold the button that you want to register
Operation buttons
SOURCE ON/OFF
CHANNEL +, –
uiop
ENTER
Function
Power on/standby
Switch channels (up/down)
Cursor operation
Enter
5 on the other remote control until “OK” is displayed
on the Marantz remote control display.
• If “NG” is shown on the remote control display, perform step 5
again. If “NG” is shown again on the remote control display, the
remote control may not be able to learn the code correctly. In this
case, use the specialized remote control for the device.
• If the remote control memory becomes full, “FULL” is shown
on the remote control display. If you want to learn the code, you
should erase other learned button.
Remembering remote control codes from
other devices
0 – 9
CLR
Channel selection
Clear the inputting
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Place the Marantz remote control and remote control
1 from the other device approximately 5 cm apart,
(Default : Marantz)
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons for the
with the remote control signal transmission sections
facing each other.
6 same input source.
Repeat steps 3 to 6 to learn other input sources.
7
When programming of the remote control unit is
5 cm
8 completed, press SET.
The LEARN display disappears, and the remote control unit
exits learn mode.
NOTE
• The learning function is unavailable for all SOURCE ON/OFF, MACRO
and HDMI in any mode.
• The learning function is unavailable for all buttons in TUNER mode,
AMP mode, NET/USB mode and M-XP mode.
• The learning procedure does not operate correctly if the batteries
have become worn.
• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the
LEARN mode, the remote control unit automatically exits from the
LEARN mode.
Press and hold down SET and
2 SOURCE SEL until the LEARN
indicator blinks.
Press input source select buttons
3 to select the input source.
The input source is shown in the remote
control display.
Select the button to be learned.
LEARN indicator lights up.
4
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Operating learn function
nDelete remote control codes for all input
Delete saved remote control codes
sources
Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all
memory contents.
Press and hold down SET and
1 SOURCE SEL until the LEARN
nDelete remote control codes for each button
indicator blinks.
Press and hold down SET and
Press and hold down HDMI and
1 SOURCE SEL until the LEARN
2 press ON and STANDBY .
indicator blinks.
LEARN indicator lights.
Press input source select buttons
Press ENTER to continue erasing.
3 “ERASE” is shown in the remote
control display, and the mode returns
to learning mode.
• To cancel the erasing operation, do not
press ENTER and simply press any other
button.
2 to select the input source you
want to delete.
The input source is shown in the remote
control display.
Press and hold down HDMI and
3 press the learned button to be
• To return the normal mode, press SET.
erased twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control
display, and the mode returns to learning
mode.
NOTE
Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code, or there will leave
empty if the button has no factory preset code.
• To return the normal mode, press SET.
nDelete remote control codes for each input
source
Press and hold down SET and
1 SOURCE SEL until the LEARN
indicator blinks.
Press and hold down HDMI and
2 press the learned input source
select buttons to be erased twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control
display.
Press ENTER to continue erasing.
3 The
indicator blinks twice and the
mode returns to LEARN mode.
• To cancel the erasing operation, do not
press ENTER, and simply press any other
button.
• To return the normal mode, press SET.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Operating macro function
• When the macro function is used, operations that usually require a
complicated series of multiple button operations can be performed
easily just by pressing the MACRO button.
• This device can remember up to 6 macro functions.
• Each macro can record a maximum of 10 steps.
Editing recorded macro operations
When the macro operation recording is complete,
[Example] Changing macro operation “1” recorded on number button
4 press and hold ENTER until the LEARN indicator
“1” to “3”, and changing the number button to“2”
and MACRO indicator switch off.
Press and hold MACRO and
[Example] To playback a DVD
qTurn this unit’s power on
NOTE
1 MENU together until “MACRO”
The RETURN, uiop, ENTER, VOLUME +, – and CLR buttons cannot
be recorded as macro operations.
flashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote
control display.
↓
wSwitch this unit's input source to DVD
↓
eTurn the TV’s power on
↓
Checking recorded macro operations
[Example] Checking the recorded macro operations to button “1”
Press the number button (“1”)
rDVD Playback
2 that you want to change.
The LEARN indicator, MACRO indicator
and “M1-01” flashes in the remote
control display.
Press and hold MACRO and
Recording macro operations
[Example] Recording DVD playback operations to the number “1”
1 MENU together until “MACRO”
flashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote
control display.
button
Press uito select the macro
3 operation button (“2”) to edit.
Press and hold SET and MACRO
After the macro operation button is
displayed, the recorded operation is
performed.
1 together until “MACRO”
Press the number button (“1”)
2 that you want to check.
flashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote
control display.
The LEARN indicator, MACRO indicator
and “M1-01” flashes in the remote
control display.
• When the macro operation is updated as a recorded step, press
the input source switching button, and then press the new step
button (“2”).
• To insert a new macro operation between recorded steps, after
performing step 3, press MEMORY and then press the new step
button (“2”).
When a new step is introduced, if the total number of steps is
already 10, the 10th step is deleted after the new step is introduced.
• To delete recorded macro operations, after step 3, call the step
number that you want to delete, and press CLR.
• To return to step 1, press ENTER.
Press the macro operation
Press the VOLUME +, –.
3 • The LEARN indicator switches off,
and “M1-01” is shown in the remote
control display.
2 number (“1”) that you want to
record to.
“M1-01” is shown in the remote control
display.
• The recorded macro operation is
performed.
• If the number that you want to record to
has already been recorded to, the recorded
number flashes in the display.
Repeat step 3 until the final number of the macro
4 operation is displayed.
When the macro operation edit is complete, press and
Press the input source switch
4 hold ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches off.
• The display returns to that of step 1.
3 button (“DVD”) of the operation
• When the macro operation number is displayed, the
corresponding macro operation is performed.
that you want to record along
with the command button (“1”).
The macro operation step number is
shown in the remote control display.
When the macro operation check is complete, press
5 and hold ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches
off.
• To record the amp input source, press AMP first, followed by the
input source switching button.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Operating macro function
Setting the back light
Adjusting the interval time of macro operations
transmitting
The macro operation transmission interval can be adjusted.
• The factory setting is “1 second”.
Using macro operations
[Example] Using the recorded macro operations to button “1”
Press the Light button on the side of the remote control, and the
buttons on the remote control light for 2 seconds. If the Light button
is pressed while the buttons are lit, the buttons remain lit for another
2 seconds.
Press the MACRO.
• Backlight is set on in the factory settings.
1 “MACRO” is shown in the MACRO
indicator and remote control display.
Press and hold MACRO and
nDisabling the backlight
1 SOURCE SEL until “SETUP”
Press the number button (“1”)
is shown in the remote control
2 that you want to use.
Press and hold both SET and
STANDBY until indicator flashes
twice.
display.
Macro operations recorded to number
“SETUP” is shown for 3 seconds in
the remote control display, after which
“MCR05z” is displayed.
button “1” are performed one at a time.
• The step number shown in the remote
control display disappears after the step is
performed.
• When all macro operations are completed,
the remote control returns to the amp
operation mode.
z The current transmission interval is
shown.
nTurning the backlight on
Press opto change to the desired transmission
Press and hold both SET and ON
until indicator flashes twice.
2 interval.
• The interval time can be changed from 0.5 to 5 seconds by 0.5
seconds step.
Deleting recorded macro operations
[Example] Deleting the macro operations recorded to button“2”
When the adjustment is complete, press and hold
3 ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches off.
Press and hold MACRO and
1 MENU together until “MACRO”
flashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote
control display.
Press and hold CLR and the
2 number (“2”) that you want
to delete for approximately 3
seconds.
“M2-CL” flashes in the remote control
display.
Press the ENTER.
3 The recorded macro operation is deleted,
and the remote control returns to step 1.
• To cancel the macro delete operation, press
a different button without pressing ENTER.
When the macro operation delete is complete,
4 press and hold ENTER until the MACRO indicator
switches off.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Information
Information
Here, we list various information related to this unit.
Please refer to this information as needed.
FPart names and functions vpage 98
FOther information vpage 103
FTroubleshooting vpage 112
FSpecifications vpage 116
FIndex vpage 117
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Part names and functions
GWith the door openH
W W W Q
Front panel
9
Q
8
Q
7
Q
6
Q
5
Q
4
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
W
W
4
W
5
W
6
W
7
W
8
W
9
E
E
E
Q
E
u
y
t
r
i
o
Q
Q
Q
iHeadphones jack
QAudyssey DSX™ button (A-DSX) ·············(75)
WM-DAX button / indicator··························(76)
WPURE DIRECT button / indicator···············(46)
When the headphones are plugged into this
jack, audio will no longer be output from the
connected speakers or from the PRE OUT
connectors.
®
®
WDynamic EQ /Dynamic Volume button
(DYNAMIC EQ/VOL)···································(74)
NOTE
WSURROUND MODE button························(44)
WAUTO button ································(44, 60, 115)
WDISPLAY button····································(60, 86)
WSTATUS button ··········································(88)
q
w
e
To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume
level excessively when using headphones.
oSETUP MIC jack······································(9, 52)
QiPod/USB port ············································(20)
QHDMI connector··········································(16)
QDIGITAL connector·····································(19)
QAUX1 INPUT connectors ···························(19)
QRETURN button·································· (64 – 66)
QENTER button····································· (64 – 66)
QCursor buttons (uiop)·················· (64 – 66)
QMENU button··············································(66)
QSub display ·················································(99)
qPower operation button
rVOLUME control knob·······························(26)
tRemote control sensor ····························(102)
yMain display················································(99)
uINPUT SELECTOR knob ·····························(25)
(ON/STANDBY) ······································(7, 12)
Turns power to this unit on and off (standby).
WSpeaker A/B switching button
(SPKR A/B)··················································(26)
wPower indicator ··········································(12)
WHDMI OUT button ······································(16)
WZONE SELECT button ································(62)
EZONE2 ON/OFF button······························(62)
EZONE3 ON/OFF button······························(62)
ESLEEP button··············································(56)
EBAND button ··············································(32)
eDoor
When you are using buttons and/or terminals
behind the door, press the bottom of the door
to open it. When not using buttons and/or
terminals behind the door, close it. Be careful
not to catch your fingers when closing the door.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 98
2010/08/23
18:33:22
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Display
Sub Display
Main Display
Q
r
Q
Q
Q Q
Q
Q
o
i
u
q
w
e
r
t y
qInput signal indicators
wInput signal channel indicators
oAUDYSSEY indicators
Lighting is as follows, depending on the setting of “Dynamic EQ
®
”
®
(vpage 74) and “Dynamic Volume ” (vpage 75).
These light when digital signals are input.
When playing HD Audio sources, the
signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,
center, surround, surround back or LFE channel) is input.
If there are two or more extension channels, the
indicators light.
q
w
e
indicator lights when a
When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are
“ON”.
qLight illumination
When “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” and “Dynamic
Volume” is “OFF”.
When the power to this device is switched on, the surrounding
area is lit blue. The settings can be changed so the light does not
switch on (vpage 89 “Switches light illumination on/off”).
and
When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are
“OFF”.
eInformation display
wMaster volume indicator
The input source name, surround mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
eInput source indicator
QSleep timer indicator
The currently selected input source name is displayed.
If the input source name has been changed using “Input Setup” –
“Rename” (vpage 71) in the menu, the input source name after
the change is displayed.
This lights when the sleep mode is selected (vpage 56).
rSurround back/front height/front wide channel indicators
When audio is output from the surround back channels, the “SB”,
“SBL” or “SBR” indicator lights. When audio is output from the
front height channels, the “H” indicator lights. When audio is
output from the front wide channels, the “W” indicator lights.
QMulti-zone indicators
This lights up when ZONE2, ZONE3 (separate room) power is
turned on (vpage 62).
QInput mode indicators
tFront speaker indicator
Settheaudioinputmodesforthedifferentinputsources(vpage71).
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
QHDMI indicator
yMonitor output indicator
This lights when playing using HDMI connections.
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting.
QTuner reception mode indicators
uMaster volume indicator
These light according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “HD Radio”.
STEREO : In the FM mode, this light when receiving stereo
broadcasts.
iMUTE indicator
This lights when the mute mode is select (vpage 26).
TUNED : Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
AUTO : This light when in the auto tuning mode.
QDecoder indicators
These light when the respective decoders are operating.
QHD indicator
This light during HD Radio reception.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Rear panel
See the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
Q
QQ
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
o
i
Q
Q
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
qRS-232C connector·································································· (54) QNETWORK connector······························································ (24)
NOTE
wHD Radio antenna terminals ·················································· (22) QFLASHER IN jack
Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel.
Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to
control this unit.
eAnalog audio connectors···········································(17 – 21, 23)
rUNBALANCED PRE OUT terminals ········································· (6)
QREMOTE CONTROL jacks ······················································· (53)
t7.1CH INPUT connectors ························································ (23)
QM-XPort jack ············································································ (23)
yBALANCED PRE OUT terminals··············································· (6)
QSIRIUS connector ···································································· (22)
uAC inlet (AC IN)·········································································· (7)
QDC OUT jacks··········································································· (54)
iCOMPONENT VIDEO connectors····································(17 – 19)
QVIDEO connectors ····························································(17 – 19)
oHDMI connectors····································································· (16)
QSIGNAL GND terminal ···························································· (21)
QDigital audio connectors··················································(17 – 21)
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Remote control unit
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
qDisplay
WSystem buttons
Q
qLEARN indicator ·······································(93)
wMACRO indicator······································(95)
eInformation display
························· (28, 29, 36 – 38, 40, 42, 43, 92)
• Pause button (3)
• Play button (1)
q
r
indicator·················································(91)
• Stop button (2)
• Skip buttons (8, 9)
• Search buttons (6, 7)
wSOURCE power button··················(62, 92, 93)
eSET button······································(91, 93, 95)
rHDMI button ·········································(16, 94)
tInput mode button (A/D)···························(71)
yInput source select buttons·······················(25)
uSource select button (SOURCE SEL)········(25)
iINPUT buttons (d, f) ·····················(25, 62, 91)
w
Q
e
FM/AM band switching button (BAND)···(34)
WSTEREO button···········································(46)
EAUTO buttons·······························(44, 60, 115)
q
w
e
r
Q
W
r
t
®
EMULTEQ button·······································(74)
EAudio delay button (A.DELAY)··················(76)
EM-DAX button ············································(76)
EChannel level button (CH LVL)··················(56)
ESLEEP button··············································(56)
EINSERT button············································(65)
EDELETE button ···········································(65)
EPure direct button (P.DIRECT)···················(46)
EREPEAT button·····································(28, 29)
RRANDOM button ··································(28, 29)
RAudyssey DSX button (A-DSX)·················(75)
y
oDISPLAY/
Tuner mode (T.MODE) button ············(32, 86)
W
QSHIFT/TOP MENU button··············(33, 36, 65)
QCursor buttons (uiop)·················· (64 – 66)
QMENU button··············································(66)
QMACRO button ···········································(95)
QNumber buttons·······················(33, 36, 91, 95)
QClear button (CLR)······································(96)
QTUNING buttons (+, –) ·······························(32)
QRemote control signal transmitter
u
i
W
W
o
Q
W
W
®
®
RDynamic EQ /Dynamic Volume button
W
(DYN EQ/VOL) ······································(74, 75)
Q
Q
Q
QPower buttons (ON, STANDBY)············(7, 12)
QSpeaker A/B button (SPKR A/B)···············(26)
WTEST TONE button·····································(79)
WMuting button (MUTE) ······························(26)
WLight button················································(96)
RVideo select button (V.SEL) ······················(69)
W
RTV operation buttons
(TV POWER / INPUT) ···························(92, 93)
RCHANNEL/
W
PRESET buttons (+, –) ··············(33, 36, 92, 93)
W
E
WMaster volume control buttons
(VOLUME +, –)· ···········································(26)
E
R
E
E
WSurround mode (SURR.) /
MEMORY button ····························(33, 36, 44)
Q
R
R
WSEARCH/
E
E
E
Information (INFO) button·······(27, 31, 33, 66)
R
R
WENTER button····································· (64 – 66)
Q
Q
R
WRETURN button·································· (64 – 66)
E
E
E
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Remote control unit
Operating range of the remote control unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
Inserting the batteries
q Remove the rear lid in the
direction of the arrow and
remove it.
w Load the two batteries
properly as indicated by
the marks in the battery
compartment.
R03/AAA
30°
30°
Approx. 23 ft / 7 m
e Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
NOTE
The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not
operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight,
strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared
light.
• Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit.
• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate
even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit. (The
supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.)
• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction,
following the qand wmarks in the battery compartment.
• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
• Do not use two different types of batteries.
• Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in
flames.
• Do not keep the battery in a place exposed to direct sunlight or in
places with extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater.
• If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside
of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
• Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in
use for long periods.
• Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the local
regulations regarding battery disposal.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Other information
“Made for iPod” and “Made for
iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPod, or
iPhone, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the
operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod shuffle, and iPod touch are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
• Individual users are permitted to
use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic,
iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod
touch for private copy and playback
of non-copyrighted contents and
contents whose copy and playback
is permitted by law. Copyright
infringement is prohibited by law.
n Trademark information (vpage 103)
n Surround (vpage 104)
n Relationship between video signals and monitor
output (vpage 108)
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
n Explanation of terms (vpage 109)
Trademark information
This product uses the following technologies:
Manufactured under license from
Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and
foreign patents pending. Audyssey
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;
6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S.
®
MultEQ XT is a registered trademark
of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey
®
Dynamic EQ
is
a
registered
and worldwide patents issued
&
trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
registered trademark of Audyssey
Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic
Surround Expansion™ is a trademark
of Audyssey Laboratories.
pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks, & DTS-HD,
DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under license from
DTS Licensing Limited. DTS and the
Symbol are registered trademarks,
& DTS Neural Surround and the DTS
logos are trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
®
is a
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All
rights reserved.
Service not available in Alaska and
Hawaii.
®
DLNA , the DLNA Logo and DLNA
®
CERTIFIED are trademarks, service
marks, or certification marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance.
Device Class: DMP (Digital Media
Player)
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected
by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited
®
DLNA Certified Product Function:
FINDS, PLAYS
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-
Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks
of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United
States and other countries.
Content Type: audio, images, videos
(Check supported media formats.)
DLNA consumer website: www.dlna.
org
Some content may not be compatible
with other DLNA Certified products
HD Radio™ Technology
®
Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the
(example: optional media formats)
HD Radio logo are proprietary
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Surround
This unit is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
Surround modes and parameters
This table shows the speakers that can be used in each surround mode and the surround parameters adjustable in each surround mode.
Symbols in the table
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).
Channel output
Surround Parameter (vpage 73)
DRC
z6
(vpage 73)
D. Comp
z7
(vpage 73)
LFE
z8
(vpage 73)
HT-EQ
z5
Surround mode (vpage 44)
Front
L/R
Surround
L/R
Surround back
L/R
Front height
L/R
Front wide
L/R
Center
Subwoofer
z4
(vpage 73)
PURE DIRECT (2channel)
PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
DIRECT (2channel)
DIRECT (Multi-channel)
STEREO
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
D
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
z1
z1
z1
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
z4
S
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
z1
z1
z1
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
MULTI CH IN
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gA-DSX
DTS NEO:6
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
Audyssey DSX
DOLBY DIGITAL
D
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
z2
z3
D
D
D
z2
z2
z3
z3
D
D
D
D
S
S
S
D
D
D
D
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS SURROUND
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD
DTS Express
MULTI CH STEREO
NEURAL
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER
DOLBY HEADPHONE
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
z1 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
z2 If “Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to “ON–Height–”, sound is output from the front height speakers.
z3 If “Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to “ON–Wide–”, sound is output from the front wide speakers.
z4 Only when “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main” (vpage 79), sound is output from the subwoofer.
z5 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.
z6 This item can be selected when a Dolby TrueHD signal is played.
z7 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is played.
z8 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Surround
Surround Parameter (vpage 73)
z10
Audyssey Settings
(vpage 74)
NEO:6 Music mode
Audyssey DSX™
Tone
z9
(vpage 73)
M-DAX
z13
(vpage 76)
PRO LOGIC g/gx Music mode only
only
Soundstage
z10
(vpage 75)
Surround mode (vpage 44)
Height Gain
(vpage 73)
®
®
Dynamic EQ
z11
(vpage 74)
Dynamic Volume
z12
®
Panorama
Dimension
(vpage 73)
C.Width
C.Image
(vpage 73)
MultEQ XT
(vpage 74)
(vpage 73)
(vpage 73)
(vpage 75)
PURE DIRECT (2 channel)
PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
DIRECT (2 channel)
DIRECT (Multi-channel)
STEREO
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
MULTI CH IN
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gA-DSX
DTS NEO:6
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
Audyssey DSX
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS SURROUND
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD
DTS Express
MULTI CH STEREO
NEURAL
S
S
S
S
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER
DOLBY HEADPHONE
z9 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to “ON”.
z10 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.
z11 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ XT” (vpage 74) is set to “OFF” or “Manual”.
z12 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to “OFF”.
z13 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Surround
nTypes of input signals, and corresponding surround modes
This table shows the input signal that can be played in each surround mode. Check the audio signal of the input source then select the surround mode.
Symbols in the table
S This indicates the selectable surround mode.
Input signal types and formats
PCM
DTS-HD
DTS-HD
High
DTS
DOLBY
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
Surround mode (vpage 44)
NOTE
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS ES
DSCRT
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag) (With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
ANALOG
LINEAR PCM LINEAR PCM
DTS
DTS
(5.1ch)
DOLBY
DOLBY
DTS 96/24
(multi ch)
(2ch)
Resolution EXPRESS
Audio
TrueHD DIGITAL Plus
DTS SURROUND
DTS-HD MSTR
DTS-HD HI RES
z5
z5
S
S
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
DTS ES MTRX6.1
DTS SURROUND
z1z3
z1z3
z5
S
S
S
S
S
DTS 96/24
z5
S
S
S
S
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MOVIE
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC
DTS (–HD) + PLgz
DTS EXPRESS
DTS (–HD) + NEO:6
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA A-DSX
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC A-DSX
Audyssey DSX
z2z3
z1z3
z4
z5
z1z3
z5
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
z5
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY TrueHD
z5
z5
S
DOLBY DIGITAL+
S
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
z1z3
z1z3
z5
z2z3
z1z3
z4
z1z3
z1z3
z1z3
z4
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MOVIE
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MUSIC
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgz
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MOVIE
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gMOVIE
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gMUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gGAME
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
z5
z5
z5
z1 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z2 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z3 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z5 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage 75) setting is set to “ON”.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Surround
Input signal types and formats
PCM
LINEAR PCM LINEAR PCM
DTS-HD
DTS
DOLBY
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS-HD
High
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
Surround mode (vpage 44)
NOTE
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS ES
DSCRT
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag) (With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
ANALOG
DTS
DTS
(5.1ch)
DOLBY
DOLBY
DTS 96/24
(multi ch)
(2ch)
Resolution EXPRESS
Audio
TrueHD DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gMOVIE A-DSX
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gMUSIC A-DSX
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gGAME A-DSX
Audyssey DSX
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER
DOLBY HEADPHONE
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
z5
z2z3
z1z3
z4
z3
z3
S
S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx MOVIE
MULTI CH IN + PLgx MUSIC
MULTI CH IN + PLgz
MULTI CH IN + Dolby EX
MULTI CH IN 7.1
S
S
S
S (7.1)
S
Audyssey DSX
DIRECT
DIRECT
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
MULTI CH STEREO
STEREO
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
STEREO
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
NEURAL
NEURAL
AUTO
AUTO
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
z1 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z2 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z3 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z5 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage 75) setting is set to “ON”.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Relationship between video signals and monitor output
MAIN ZONE MONITOR OUT
Input Signals
Output Signals
Menu displayed
COMPONENT
Video Convert
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
z2
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
A
A
A
A
1
2
Wall paper
A
A
A
A
A
A
Only the menu is
displayed
z2
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
A
z3
3
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
S(VIDEO)
A(VIDEO)
A(VIDEO)
A
S(1080p)
z2
4
A
A
A
A(COMPONENT)
A
S(1080i ~ 480p)
A
5
A
z3
COMPONENT
S(COMPONENT)
A(COMPONENT)
A
S(480i/576i)
A
6
A
S(1080p)
S
S
S
S
A
7
COMPONENT
A(COMPONENT)
z1
–
A
S(1080p)
ON
8
–
S(VIDEO)
VIDEO
A(VIDEO)
ON
ON
A
S(1080i ~ 480p)
9
z3
COMPONENT
S(COMPONENT)
A(COMPONENT)
z2
A
S(480i/576i)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
ON
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
ON
S
A
VIDEO
A
A(VIDEO)
A
HDMI
S(HDMI)
ON
S
S
A
z2
COMPONENT
A
A(COMPONENT)
ON
S
S
A
VIDEO
VIDEO
A
A(VIDEO)
A(VIDEO)
A
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
z2
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
A
z2
COMPONENT
A(COMPONENT)
A
S
A
VIDEO
A
A(VIDEO)
A
Only the menu is
displayed
S
S
S
S
A
A
z2
A
A
S
A
VIDEO
A
A(VIDEO)
A
HDMI
S
S
z2
COMPONENT
A(COMPONENT)
S
VIDEO
A(VIDEO)
S
A
Video signal input present
No video signal input
A No video signal output
S( ) Superimposed on the picture indicated in ( ).
A ( ) Only the picture in ( ) is output.
z1 When no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on
A
Neither the picture nor the menu is output.
z2 Only the menu is displayed when no HDMI monitor is
connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on.
z3 If an HDMI monitor is not connected or power of an HDMI
monitor is not turned on, the menu is superimposed on a video
image in parenthesis.
ZONE2 MONITOR OUT
• The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and
PAL-60.
• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video and Video connectors.
• The menu display cannot be superimposed when x.v.Color signals and computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.
Input Signals
COMPONENT
Output Signals
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
1
2
3
4
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
A
S
A
NOTE
S
S
S
S
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu screen. The playback video is
not displayed behind the menu screen.
S
S
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Explanation of terms
sound components for a seamless and enveloping
soundstage. Unfortunately, the additional two back
surround channels in 7.1-channel systems are not
in the right place to provide a significant perceptual
improvement.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion is a scalable
system that can adapt to the practical needs of the
user. The first level of surround stage enhancement
comes from adding the Wide channels. The second
level comes from adding the Height channels. If it
is practical to have both Wides and Heights then
the surround performance will be further enhanced.
DSX automatically reconfigures its processing to
optimize surround rendering over any number of
available speakers beyond that of 5.1-channel.
D
A
Deep Color
A2DP
This technology allows expression of more number
of colors than the conventional 8 bits and can
reproduce colors close to natural ones without color
streak.
A2DP is one profile of Bluetooth definded for
in-car devices or AV devices that use wireless
communication instead of a cable.
Adding more channels to a surround system is
not for special effects. Accurate spatial sound
reproduction requires rendering of directional
sound cues and non-directional ambient cues.
Refl ections arriving after the direct sound play a
critical role in the perception of soundstage width
and depth. To have the most impact, additional
surround channels should be used to control the
direction, time of arrival, and frequency response
of the refl ected sound to render an expanded
soundstage that reproduces sound with better
localization and envelopment than what 5.1-channel
systems provide.
Research in the perception of auditory source width
has shown that there are strong preferences in the
direction of refl ected sound and the perception of
soundstage width and spaciousness. The single
most important direction of side-wall refl ections
is 60°. DSX provides a pair of Wide channels
(LW and RW) at 60° with appropriate frequency
response and perceptual processing to match the
requirements of human hearing. In fact, the Wide
channels are much more critical in the presentation
of a realistic soundstage than then Back Surround
channels found in traditional 7.1-channel systems. A
more enveloping 7.1-channel system is one in which
Wide speakers are used instead of Back Surround
speakers. Adding surround channels behind the
listener has a very small impact compared to the
increase in envelopment and soundstage width that
the front wide channels will provide.
After side refl ections, the next most important
acoustical and perceptual cues come from refl
ections above the front stage. DSX provides a pair
of Height channels (LH and RH) at a 45° azimuth
angle and elevated to a 45° angle in the median
plane.
In addition to creating new Wide and Height
channels, DSX also provides Surround Processing
to enhance the envelopment of the Surround and
Back Surround channels (if present). DSX Surround
Processing processes the standard surround signals
in the time and frequency domains to improve the
perceived sense of envelopment and blending with
the other speakers in the surround system.
Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
DLNA
Like x.v.Color, each of these color spaces defines
a palette of available colors that is larger than the
traditional RGB color model.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
(A-DSX)
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/
or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
Some contents may not be compatible with other
DLNA CERTIFIED™ products.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased
by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem
with Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well-balanced
sound for every listener at any volume level.
Realistic reproduction of sound relies on the
ability of audio systems to match human hearing
performance. Three key requirements are: (1)
frequency response, (2) dynamic range, and (3)
accurate spatial reproduction. The requirements for
frequency response have already been surpassed
with sampling rates that exceed human hearing.
The dynamic range limits of human perception
have also been met with current digital audio
systems operating capable of signal to noise ratios
that approach 120 dB. Accurate spatial sound
rendering, however, has not yet reached the limits
of perception as human perception relies on the
combination of sounds arriving from many more
directions than what 5.1-channel surround sound
systems provide. Audyssey DSX technology was
developed to overcome the spatial sound rendering
limitations faced by 5.1-channel surround sound
formats.
The ITU 5.1-channel channel standard recommends
three front loudspeakers and two rear loudspeakers.
The Left (L) and Right (R) front loudspeakers should
be placed at 30° relative to the central listening
position. The Center (C) loudspeaker should be at
0° and the surround loudspeakers (SL, SR) should
be placed between 100° and 120°. All loudspeakers
must be equidistant from the center listening
position or compensated with time delay if that
is not possible. A separate low-frequency effects
(LFE) channel is used to reproduce additional bass
content from the subwoofer.
A total of 5.1 channels are played: 3 front channels
(“FL”, “FR” and “C”),
2
surround channels
(“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequencies.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between
channels and a realistic sound field with a “three-
dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement
and positioning) is achieved.
A realistic, powerful sense of presence is achieved
when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format
proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users
to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY DIGITAL
SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by
Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films.
®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ
is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the
playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround
impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.
®
Audyssey MultEQ XT
Audyssey MultEQ XT is
a
room equalization
solution that calibrates any audio system so that
it can achieve optimum performance for every
listener in a large listening area. Based on several
room measurements, MultEQ XT calculates an
equalization solution that corrects for both time
and frequency response problems in the listening
area and also performs a fully automated surround
system setup.
The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back
channels, provide improved sound positioning and
expression of space.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal
format that is compatible with up to 7.1 channels
of discrete digital sound and also improves sound
quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance.
It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby
Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to
the source signal and the conditions of the playback
equipment.
Auto Lip Sync
If you connect this unit to a TV that supports the
Auto Lip Sync function, it can automatically correct
delay between the audio and video.
B
Bluetooth
There are certain things that 5.1-channel surround
sound systems do well compared to 2-channel
stereo. For example, it is possible to move sounds
across the front seamlessly. It is also possible to
create ambience behind the listener. But 5.1 channel
surround systems do not provide enough channels
from which to render the required refl ected
Bluetooth
is
a
short-distance
wireless
communication technology used for connecting
handheld devices several meters apart. This enables
notebook computers, PDA s, mobile phones, etc. to
connect without a cable for transmitting audio and
data.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Explanation of terms
Dolby Headphone
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby Pro Logic gz
The Dolby Headphone technology provides
a surround sound listening experience over
headphones.
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format
sound quality playback in 5.1 channels with a created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This
sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio
Dolby Pro Logic gz introduces a new dimension to
Home Entertainment through the addition of a pair
of front height channels. Compatible with stereo,
5.1-channel and 7.1-channel content, Dolby Pro
Logic gz provides enhanced spaciousness, depth
and dimension to movies, concert video and video
game playback while maintaining the full integrity
of the source mix.
Dolby Pro Logic gz identifies and decodes spatial
cues that occur naturally in all content, directing
this information to the front height channels,
complementing the performance of left and right
surround sound speakers. Content that is encoded
with Dolby Pro Logic gz height channel information
can be even more revealing, with perceptually
discrete height channel information bringing an
exciting new dimension to home entertainment.
Dolby Pro Logic gz, with front height channels is
also an ideal alternative for households that cannot
support the placement of back surround speakers
of a typical 7.1-channel system but may have
bookshelf space available to support the addition of
height speakers.
When listening to multichannel content such
as DVD movies over headphones, the listening
experience is fundamentally different than listening
to speakers. Since the headphone speaker drivers
are covering the pinna of the ear, the listening
experience differs greatly from traditional speaker
playback. Dolby utilizes patented headphone
perspective curves to solve this problem and
provides a non-fatiguing, immersive, home theater
listening experience. Dolby Headphone also
delivers exceptional 3D audio from stereo material.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless
coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound
of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to
8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of
96kHz/24bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
channels with a sampling frequency of 96kHz/24bit
resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a
DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit resolution.
format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling It is fully compatible with conventional products,
frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1 channels including conventional DTS digital surround
of digital discrete surround sound.
5.1-channel data.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS Neural Surround
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete DTS Neural Surround has been chosen as the
digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) surround sound format for XM Satellite Radio’s
channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
“XM HD Surround”, TV sports broadcasting, 7.1
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well
is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
as leading FM and HD Radio stations. It delivers
the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital surround sound by unmasking the audio details,
audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel typically lost by other playback modes. Audiences
to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix will experience the deep ambience and subtle
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel details of movies, music and games.
audio signals is also possible according to the DTS NEO:6™ Surround
decoder.
DTS Express
DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology
for achieving 6.1-channel surround playback
with
a
sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit
resolution. Dolby TrueHD is adopted for applications
that put very high importance on sound quality.
Dolby Pro Logic g
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into
5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect.
The surround channel signals are converted into
stereo and full band signals (with a frequency
response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to create
a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich
sense of presence for all stereo sources.
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6
Dolby Virtual Speaker
rates (max. 5.1 channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
Cinema” suited for playing movies and “DTS
NEO:6 Music” suited for playing music.
Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technology certified
by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized
surround sound experience from two speakers
using a multichannel Dolby Digital source.
Additionally, Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the
surround sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic
or Dolby Pro Logic g.
Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original
Multichannel audio information and provides the
listener with the sensation of being surrounded by
additional speakers.
This audio technology provides higher sound quality Dynamic range
and enhanced functionality than the conventional The difference between the maximum undistorted
DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray sound level and the minimum discernible level
Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high above the noise emitted by the device.
data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and
lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are
supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
F
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is a codec for
audio data compression.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved
Dolby Pro Logic gx
version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and
DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with
sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to
Downmix
H
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of
the Dolby Pro Logic gmatrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded
to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1 channels.
There are three modes: “Music” suited for playing
music, “Movie” suited for playing movies, and
“Game” which is optimized for playing games.
This function converts the number of channels of
surround audio to less number of channels and
plays back.
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices,
7.1 channels of discrete digital sound. High data
this copyright protection technology encrypts
bit rate performance provides high quality sound.
the signals to prevent content from being copied
DTS
This format is fully compatible with conventional
without authorization.
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System,
which is a digital audio system developed by DTS.
When playing back audio by connecting this system
with a device such as DTS amplifier, accurate sound
field position and realistic sound effect as if you are
in a movie theater can be obtained.
products, including conventional DTS digital
HDMI
surround 5.1-channel data.
This is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can
be connected to a TV or amplifier. Video signal and
audio signal can be connected using 1 cable.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Explanation of terms
L
S
W
X
LFE
Sampling frequency
WAV (Wave)
x.v.Color
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave
which is an output channel that emphasizes (analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing
low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is the height of the wave at each reading in digitized
intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep format (producing a digital signal).
WAV is a standard audio format of Windows. The This function lets HDTVs display colors more
file size tends to increase, but sound near the accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid
original sound can be maintained.
colors. “x.v.Color” is a Sony registered trademark.
Windows Media DRM
This is a copyright protection technology developed
by Microsoft.
Z
bass.
The number of readings taken in one second is
called the “sampling frequency”. The larger the
value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.
ZONE2
M
This unit can operate in a room other than the room
where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2
playback). The room for ZONE2 playback is called
ZONE2.
Content providers are using the digital rights
management technology for Windows Media
contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect
the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so
that their intellectual property, including copyright,
in such content is not misappropriated. This
device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure
Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of
the WM-DRM Software in this device has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure
Content Owners) may request that Microsoft
revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire
new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure
Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM
Software’s ability to play unprotected content.
A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to
your device whenever you download a license for
Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC.
Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license,
also download revocation list onto your device on
behalf of Secure Content Owners.
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the
MAIN ZONE .
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω
(ohms). Greater power can be obtained with this
value smaller.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
ZONE3
This is an internationally standardized audio data
compression scheme, using the “MPEG-1” video
compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while
maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2,
MPEG-4
This unit can operate in a room other than the room
where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3
playback). The room for ZONE3 playback is called
ZONE3.
sYCC601 color
Like x.v.Color, each of these color spaces defines
a palette of available colors that is larger than the
traditional RGB color model.
V
These are the names for digital compression format vTuner
standards used for the encoding of video and audio. This is a free online content server for Internet
Video standards include “MPEG-1 Video”, “MPEG- radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade
2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio costs.
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2 For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site
Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiomarantz.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual
property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software
and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Nothing Else Matters Software and
BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
P
Pairing
Pairing is an operation required for settings to
connect two Bluetooth devices. Pairing enables
Bluetooth devices to access each other.
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of video signal that
displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared
to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and bleeding.
Protection Circuit
Windows Media Player Ver.11
This is a media player distributed free of charge by
Microsoft Corporation.
It can be used to play playlists created with
Windows Media Player Ver. 11 as well as files in
such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation.
This is a function to prevent damage to components
within the power supply when an abnormality
such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or
temperature for any reason.
In this unit, the power indicator blinks and the unit
enters standby mode when an abnormality occurs.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows
®
®
Media Player Ver.7, 7.1, Windows Media Player
®
®
for Windows XP and Windows Media Player 9
Series.
To encode WMA files, only use applications
authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use
an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
GAudioH
Symptom
Cause/Solution
Page
2. Is the set being operated as described in the user guide?
3. Are the other components operating properly?
Audio is not output.
• Check the connections for all devices.
• Check the speaker connections.
• Check whether the audio device power is turned on.
• Adjust the master volume.
• Cancel the mute mode.
• Select a suitable input source.
• Select a suitable input mode.
• Disconnect the headphones. No sound is output from the speakers
or the PRE OUT connectors when headphones are connected.
7, 16 – 24
6, 49 – 51
–
26, 62
26, 62
25, 62
71
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,
there may be a malfunction.
In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
GGeneralH
Symptom
Cause/Solution
Page
98
Power does not turn • Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power
7
on.
outlet.
No sound is
produced from
surround speaker.
• Check if the surround speakers are connected to the SURROUND
terminals.
–
Display is off.
• Set “Display” on the menu to something other than “OFF”.
86
Set does not operate • Reset the microprocessor.
properly.
115
No sound is
produced from
surround back
speaker.
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
78
78
GVideoH
• Set the surround mode to something other than “STEREO”.
44
Symptom
Cause/Solution
Page
No sound is
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
78
78
No picture appears.
• Check the TV connection.
• Set the TV input correctly.
7
7
produced from front • Set “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” on the menu to something
height speaker.
other than “None”.
No sound is
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
78
79
produced from front • Set “Speaker Config.” – “F.Wide” on the menu to something
wide speaker.
other than “None”.
No sound is
produced from
subwoofer.
• Check the subwoofer connections.
• Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
6, 49 – 51
7
78
78, 79
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” on the menu to “Yes”.
• If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”,
and “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output
from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected
surround mode.
DTS sound is not
output.
• Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”.
71
16
Dolby TrueHD, DTS- • Make HDMI connections.
HD, Dolby Digital
Plus audio is not
output.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
GHDMIH
Symptom
GHD Radio receiverH
Symptom
Cause/Solution
• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
• When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI
Audio Out” on the menu to “AMP”.
• When outputting HDMI audio from a TV, set “HDMI Audio Out”
on the menu to “TV”.
Page
Cause/Solution
Page
No audio is
output with HDMI
connection.
16
80
Reception fails, or
there is a lot of noise • Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.
or distortion.
• Change the antenna orientation or position.
22
22
22
22
• Use an FM outdoor antenna.
• Separate the antenna from other connection cables.
80
GM-XPortH
No video is
output with HDMI
connection.
• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
16
16, 25
15
Symptom
Cause/Solution
Page
• Set the input source to match the connected HDMI connector.
• Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection
(HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video
will not be output correctly.
Audio is not output
when a wireless
receiver (RX101 is
connected).
• Check that the Bluetooth device and Wireless receiver (RX101)
are correctly paired.
–
When the following
operations are
performed on
devices compatible
with HDMI control,
the same operations
occur on this unit.
• Power ON/OFF
• Switching audio
output devices
• Set “HDMI Control” on the menu to “OFF”. To operate power
only for each device, set “Power Off Control” to “OFF”.
55, 81
GInternet radio / Media server / iPod / USB memory device / Flickr / Napster / Pandora / RhapsodyH
Symptom
When a USB
memory device is
Cause/Solution
Page
• The set cannot recognize a USB memory device. Check the
connection.
20
connected, “USB” is • A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or
not displayed on the
menu.
–
–
MTP standards is connected. Connect a USB memory device
conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards.
• A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.
This is not a malfunction. Marantz does not guarantee that all USB
memory devices will operate or receive power.
• Adjust volume
• Switch input source
• USB memory device is connected via USB hub. Connect the USB
memory device directly to the USB port.
–
–
GSIRIUS Satellite RadioH
Symptom
Cause/Solution
Page
Files on a USB
memory device
cannot be played.
• USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32.
Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB
memory device’s operating instructions.
“CHECK SIRIUS
• The SiriusConnect Home Tuner unit is not connected. Check that
22
TUNER” is displayed. the connections are correct.
• USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions. When
divided into multiple partitions, only files stored in the top partition
can be played.
• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record the files in a
compatible format.
–
”ANTENNA ERROR” • The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are
22
–
is displayed.
correct.
”NO SIGNAL” is
displayed.
• The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are
correct.
28
28
”INVALID
• Channel is not present. Select another channel.
–
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files
that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.
CHANNEL” is
displayed.
The file names
are not displayed
properly (“...”, etc.).
• Characters that cannot be displayed are used. This is not a
malfunction. On this set, characters that cannot be displayed are
–
”ACQUIRING
SIGNAL” is
displayed.
• The signal cannot be received. Reposition your SiriusConnect
Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna.
• DisplayswhileSiriusConnectHomeTunerisconnected. Reposition
your SiriusConnect Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna.
–
–
replaced with a “ ”.
.
Internet radio cannot • Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is
24
34
be played.
disconnected. Check the connection status.
• Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format. Only
Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this
set.
• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the
computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
z
”Call SIRIUS” is
displayed.
• Channels are not subscribed to. If you subscribe to the channel,
you can receive the channel.
–
–
”SUBSCRIPTION
UPDATED” is
displayed.
• While updating contract information.
–
• Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Choose a radio station
that is currently broadcasting.
• IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
35
83
”Enter Lock Code
• Selected channels are locked. Please insert pass word (4 digits)
into “[ ]”
–
[
]” is displayed.
z After scroll displays “Call 888-539-....” twice, displays “Call SIRIUS”.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Symptom
Cause/Solution
Page
Symptom
Cause/Solution
Page
Files stored on a
computer cannot be
played.
• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible
format.
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files
that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.
• Set and computer are connected by USB cable. The set’s USB
port cannot be used for connection to a computer.
34
Cannot delete
Rhapsody Channel
registered in “My
Channels”
• Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application.
–
34
–
Cannot delete
• Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application.
–
Tracks, Playlists,
Channels registered
in “My Library”
Server is not found,
or it is not possible
to connect to the
server.
• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the
computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
• Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
• Server is not running. Launch the server.
• Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
• Connecting to the media server may take a few minutes the first
time you attempt to make a connection.
–
–
–
83
–
Cannot login to
Napster. (“Incorrect
Username or
Password” is
displayed.)
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Napster
has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is
not displayed.)
83
http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html
iPod cannot be
played.
• Some iPods do not support being used connected directly to the
USB port.
20
–
Cannot login to
Pandora. (“Email
address” or
“Password” is
displayed.)
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the “Email address” for
Pandora has been properly entered. Re-enter the “Password”.
(Password is not displayed.)
40
When an iPod is
connected, “No
Connection” is
displayed.
• “No Connection” may display if you connect an iPod that has
only a small amount of charge remaining in its battery to this unit.
Should this occur, charge the iPod before connecting it to this unit.
http://www.pandora.com/marantz
GRemote Control UnitH
Cannot connect to
preset or favorite
radio stations.
• Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before
trying again.
• Radio station is not currently in service. It is not possible to
connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.
–
–
Symptom
Cause/Solution
Page
The set cannot be
operated with the
remote control unit.
• Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.
• Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m
from this unit and at an angle of within 30°.
• Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control
unit.
• Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and
wmarks.
• The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct
sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set
to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed
to strong light.
102
102
For some radio
• Station is congested or not currently broadcasting. Wait a while
before trying again.
–
102
102
102
stations, “Server
Full” or “Connection
Down” is displayed
and station cannot be
connected to.
Sound is broken
during playback.
• Network’s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines
or radio station is congested. This is not a malfunction. When
playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be
broken, depending on the communications conditions.
–
Sound quality is poor • File being played has a low bit rate. This is not a malfunction.
–
or played sound is
noisy.
Cannot login
to Rhapsody.
(“Incorrect
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Rhapsody
has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is
not displayed.)
83
Username or
Password” is
displayed.)
www.rhapsody.com/marantz
Cannot compile
Playlist.
• This unit does not respond to playlist compilation. When the
playlist is compiled in PC Application, it is registered to “My
Library”. In this way, the playlist can be played in this unit
–
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Resetting the microprocessor
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.
Various setting details can be saved and reset on this device. If setting details are saved before returning
to the default values, after returning to the default settings, setting details can be returned to the same
values as before returning to the defaults.
ON/STANDBY AUTO MENU
SURROUND MODE
ENTER
SLEEP
When the power is ON, press and hold SLEEP and ENTER for more than 3 seconds.
1 After “MEMORY SAVING” is shown on the display, “COMPLETE”is shown to inform you that the
settings have been saved.
Turn off the power using ON/STANDBY.
2
3
Press ON/STANDBY while simultaneously pressing SURROUND MODE and AUTO.
Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 second, release the two
4 buttons.
Press and hold SLEEP and MENU for more than 3 seconds.
5 After “MEMORY LOAD” is shown on the display, “COMPLETE” is shown to inform you that the
settings have returned to those saved in step 1.
• To return all of the settings to the default values, perform steps 2 to 4 without performing step 1.
• If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Specifications
n Audio section
n Tuner section
[FM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω, 0 dBf = 1 x 10–15 W)
87.5 MHz – 107.9 MHz
[AM]
• Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance:
Frequency response:
S/N:
Distortion:
Rated output:
200 mV/47 kΩ
Receiving Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
S/N (IHF-A):
530 kHz – 1710 kHz
18 μV
10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
105 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
Unbalanced pre-output: 1.2 V
1.5 μV (14.8 dBf)
MONO
78 dB
STEREO 68 dB
HD
MONO
STEREO 0.2 %
HD
85 dB
0.1 %
85 dB
Balanced pre-output: 2.4 V
Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz):
• Digital
D/A output:
0.02 %
0.02 %
Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
n General
Power supply:
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
60 W
Power consumption:
Dynamic range — 100 dB
0.2 W (Standby)
4.0 W (CEC standby)
440 (W) x 187 (H) x 395 (D) mm
10.1 kg
Digital input:
Format — Digital audio interface
• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)
Maximum external dimensions:
Weight:
Input sensitivity:
RIAA deviation:
S/N:
Rated output:
Distortion factor:
2.5 mV
1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
150 mV
n Remote control unit (RC011SR)
Batteries:
R03/AAA Type (two batteries)
0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
n Video section
• Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
5 Hz – 10 MHz — +1, –3 dB
• Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance:
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Frequency response:
5 Hz – 60 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when “Video Convert” set to “OFF”)
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
Component video cable························ 17, 18, 19
Ethernet cable··················································24
HDMI cable···················································7, 16
Optical cable··································· 17, 19, 20, 21
Speaker cable ····················································6
Video cable ··········································· 17, 18, 19
Channel ······························································83
Channel Level···············································56, 79
Characters··························································65
Chroma Level·····················································77
C.Image······························································73
Coaxial digital cable············································18
Component 2 Output ·········································85
Component video cable ·························17, 18, 19
Condensation ·······················································3
Connection
7.1CH INPUT terminal ······································23
Antenna ···························································22
Blu-ray Disc player ·································· 7, 16, 17
CableTV··························································· 18
CD player ·························································20
CD recorder ·····················································21
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks ························54
Digital camcorder······································· 16, 19
DVD player················································· 16, 18
Game console·················································· 16
HDMI······························································· 15
HD Radio receiver············································22
Home network (LAN)·······································24
iPod (USB)························································20
Power cord·························································7
Record player···················································21
Remote control jacks ·······································53
RS-232C connector··········································54
Satellite tuner··················································· 18
Set-top box ················································ 16, 18
SIRIUS ·····························································22
Speaker························································5, 49
TV···························································· 7, 16, 17
USB memory device········································20
Video cassette recorder····························· 16, 19
Wireless receiver (RX101)································23
Contrast······························································77
Crossover Frequency ·········································80
C.Width ······························································73
Display··························································86, 99
Distance ·····························································79
DLNA································································109
DNR····································································77
Dolby
Index
vH
HDCP ·························································15, 110
HDMI··························································15, 110
HDMI 1.4a··························································15
HDMI Audio Out ················································80
HDMI cable ····················································7, 16
HDMI Control···············································55, 80
HDMI Setup ·······················································80
HD Radio reception······································22, 32
Headphones·······················································98
Height Gain ························································73
HPF ····································································83
HT-EQ·································································73
Hue·····································································77
vNumerics
2.1-channel·························································51
3D·······································································15
5.1-channel···················································49, 50
6.1-channel···················································48, 50
7.1-channel···············································5, 48, 49
Dolby Digital············································· 45, 109
Dolby Digital EX······································· 45, 109
Dolby Digital Plus····································· 45, 109
Dolby Headphone ·····································46, 110
Dolby Pro Logic II············································110
Dolby Pro Logic IIx··········································110
Dolby Pro Logic IIz ····································48, 110
DolbyTrueHD············································45, 110
Dolby Virtual Speaker································46, 110
Downmix··························································110
DRC····································································73
DTS ····························································45, 110
DTS 96/24·················································45, 110
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1·································45, 110
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ····································45, 110
DTS-HD·····················································45, 110
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ······················110
DTS-HD Master Audio ····································110
DTS Digital Surround ······································110
DTS Express···················································110
DTS NEO:6™ Surround ····························44, 110
DTS Neural Surround································45, 110
Dynamic EQ ·······················································74
Dynamic range ·················································110
Dynamic Volume················································75
vA
A2DP··························································23, 109
Accessories··························································2
Add New Feature···············································86
Adjust CH···························································76
Adjusting the master volume·····························26
Adobe RGB color / Adobe YCC601 color ·········109
A-DSX Soundstage·············································75
AM loop antenna················································22
Amp Assign························································78
Antenna Aiming··················································68
ARC····································································15
Aspect································································70
Audio Adjust·······················································73
Audio cable·······················6, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23
Audio Delay························································76
Audio Setup························································81
Audio/Video Adjust·············································72
Audyssey Auto Setup·····································8, 52
Audyssey DSX····················································75
Audyssey Dynamic EQ·······························74, 109
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
vI
Information·························································88
Audio Input Signal············································88
HDMI Information············································88
Preset Channel ················································88
Status·······························································88
Input Assign ·······················································68
Input Mode·························································71
Input Setup·························································66
Input signal·················································45, 106
Inputting characters ···········································65
Interval ·······························································72
i/p Scaler·····························································70
vL
vE
Learn function ····················································93
Level Lch····························································83
Level Rch ···························································83
LFE·····························································73, 111
Listening mode ··················································44
Listening position·················································8
(A-DSX)·····························································109
Audyssey Dynamic Volume ·······················75, 109
Audyssey MultEQ XT···························74, 99, 109
Audyssey Settings ·············································74
Auto Lip Sync·············································80, 109
Auto Preset ························································67
Auto Setup ·····················································8, 52
Enhancer ····························································77
EQ Customize ····················································81
Error messages (Auto Setup)·····························11
Ethernet cable····················································24
vF
vM
Fader function ····················································56
F.Height······························································78
Firmware Update ···············································86
FLAC ································································110
Flickr·····························································35, 38
FM indoor antenna·············································22
Front A/B (connection) ·································49, 51
Front height speaker ····································48, 49
Front Panel·························································98
Front wide speaker ······································48, 49
F.Wide································································79
Macro function···················································95
Maintenance Mode············································86
MAIN ZONE ·····················································111
Manual EQ ·························································76
Manual Setup·····················································77
Master volume display·······································85
M-DAX································································76
Menu map··························································63
Monitor Out························································80
MP3··································································111
MPEG·······························································111
MPEG-4 AAC····················································111
MultEQ XT··························································74
vB
Base Curve Copy················································76
Bass ·····························································73, 83
Bass Setting·······················································79
Bi-amp································································51
Bluetooth····················································23, 109
Brightness··························································77
vD
D.Comp······························································73
Decode Mode ····················································71
Deep Color ·················································15, 109
Dimension··························································73
Direct mode ·······················································27
vC
Cable
Audio cable ····················· 6, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23
Coaxial digital cable ········································· 18
vG
GUI·····································································84
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
ESPAÑOL
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
Mute Level·························································84
M-XPort······························································23
Rhapsody·························································42
SIRIUS ·····························································30
Stereo······························································46
USB memory device········································28
WMA ·························································28, 34
ZONE2·····························································62
ZONE3·····························································62
Playback Mode···················································71
Power Off Control··············································81
Power On Level ·················································84
Preset codes ······················································91
Preset Name ······················································68
Preset Skip·························································67
Presetting radio stations ····································33
Progressive ······················································111
Progressive Mode··············································70
Protection circuit ··············································111
Speaker Config.··················································78
Speaker impedance··········································111
Speaker Setup····················································78
Stage Height ······················································75
Stage Width ·······················································75
Standby Source··················································81
Still Picture ·························································72
Subwoofer setting················································9
Surround back speaker·······················5, 48, 49, 50
Surround Mode ··········································44, 104
Surround Parameter···········································73
Switcheing the light illumination ························89
Switching the front speakers ·····························26
sYCC601 color··················································111
Zone Rename·····················································85
Zone Setup·························································83
vN
Napster·························································35, 39
Network Setup···················································81
Napster Account··············································83
Network Connecting········································81
Network Information········································83
Other································································82
Rhapsody Account···········································83
vO
Optical cable·····································17, 19, 20, 21
Option Setup······················································84
Add New Feature·············································86
Component 2 Output·······································85
Display ·····························································86
Firmware Update·············································86
GUI···································································84
Maintenance Mode··········································86
Setup Lock·······················································86
Source Delete··················································84
Trigger Out·······················································85
Volume Control ················································84
Zone Rename ··················································85
vT
Tone ···································································73
Tone Control·······················································73
Trademark ························································103
Treble ···························································73, 83
Trigger Out·························································85
Troubleshooting ···············································112
Turning off the sound temporarily······················26
Turn off power (standby)····································12
Turn on power······················································7
vR
Random······························································71
Rear panel ························································100
Reference Level Offset······································74
Remote control settings·····································89
Remote control unit ···································90, 101
Inserting the batteries···································· 102
Operating AV equipment ·································90
Operating components····································92
Registering Preset Codes································91
Remote mode ····················································27
Rename······························································71
Repeat································································71
Resetting the microprocessor··························115
Resolution ··························································70
RGB Range·························································80
Rhapsody ·····················································35, 42
vV
vP
Video ··································································69
Video cable·············································17, 18, 19
Video conversion················································14
Video Convert·····················································70
Video Mode························································70
Video Select ·······················································69
Volume Control ··················································84
Volume Level ·····················································83
Volume Limit················································83, 84
vTuner ······························································111
Pairing ······························································111
Pandora ························································35, 40
Panel lock function·············································60
Panorama ···························································73
Parameter Check················································12
Parental Lock······················································67
Picture Adjust·····················································77
Playback
Blu-ray Disc player ···········································26
CD player ·························································26
Direct·······························································46
DVD player·······················································26
Flickr·································································38
HD Radio reception··········································32
Internet radio ···················································35
iPod(USB)·························································27
Media server····················································37
MP3···························································28, 34
MPEG-4 AAC ···················································34
Multi-channel ···················································44
Napster····························································39
Network audio ·················································34
Pandora····························································40
Pure direct ·······················································46
vS
Sampling frequency ·········································111
S.Back ································································78
Screensaver ·······················································84
Selecting the input source ·································25
Setup Lock ·························································86
SIRIUS··························································22, 30
Sleep timer·························································56
Slide Show ·························································72
Source Delete ····················································84
Source Level ······················································71
Speaker
vW
WAV·································································111
Web control························································58
Windows Media DRM······································111
Windows Media Player Ver.11·························111
Wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal·········57
WMA································································111
vX
x.v.Color ·····················································15, 111
Connect ···························································49
Install ···························································5, 48
Set up ··························································8, 52
Speaker cable·······················································6
vZ
ZONE2··················································61, 99, 111
ZONE3··················································61, 99, 111
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés / Lista de códigos pre-ajustados
2005, 2009, 2020, 2035,
RCA
4022, 4027, 4042, 4043,
4050, 4054, 4055
4041, 4043
4044, 4045, 4057
4048
4041, 4047, 4056
4003, 4012, 4014, 4065,
4066, 4067
4032
4024
4038
4028
4049
4046, 4056
4001, 4034
4005, 4006, 4013
4056
4025
4023, 4025, 4033
1003, 1018, 1037, 1070,
1071, 1094, 1145, 1147,
1149
Electroband
Electrohome
1001
E
Samsung
R
S
S
2057
2041
Pioneer
Device select : BD
1001, 1003, 1069, 1133
Sampo
Schneider
SKY
Skyplus
Skysat
1003, 1013, 1015, 1020,
1021, 1022, 1023, 1025,
1038, 1044, 1045, 1048,
1055, 1061, 1094, 1096,
1099, 1101, 1113
Plasmsync
Portland
Price Club
Prism
1135
2008, 2012, 2022, 2024,
2027
Samsung
Blu-ray Disc Player
1003, 1013, 1024, 1059
1026
1018
1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,
1008, 1085, 1103, 1110
1003, 1045
1010, 1069, 1073, 1111,
1153
1003, 1013, 1015, 1023,
1024, 1025, 1045, 1100,
1103, 1110, 1113
1003, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1007, 1008, 1014, 1024,
1049, 1069, 1075, 1079,
1085, 1087, 1088, 1093,
1094, 1101, 1103, 1110,
1113, 1153
Emerson
Sanyo
Sharp
2050, 2052
2044, 2045
2051
2001, 2013, 2059
2004, 2008, 2026, 2028
2046, 2060
2010
Denon
Hitachi
Integra
5034, 5035, 5036
5031, 5032, 5033
5013
5014, 5015, 5017, 5018,
5019, 5020
5010, 5011
5000, 5026, 5027
5024, 5025
5013
5001, 5002, 5003
5004
D
H
I
J
L
M
Envision
Fisher
Fujitsu
Funai
1003
Sony
Sherwood
Sony
Toshiba
Yamaha
Zenith
Proscan
Proton
1025, 1051, 1091, 1160
1038, 1124, 1125, 1155
1023, 1038, 1113
1150
1003, 1018, 1022, 1046,
1054, 1069, 1085, 1103,
1110, 1113, 1133, 1136,
1153
1003, 1013, 1024, 1030,
1045, 1080, 1100
1112, 1154
1003
1116
1003, 1012, 1031, 1032,
1037, 1041, 1045, 1047,
1065, 1068, 1082, 1088,
1094, 1139, 1140, 1145,
1159
1067
1134
1067
1003, 1013, 1018, 1019,
1024, 1026, 1046, 1047,
1054, 1063, 1083, 1085,
1100, 1103, 1110, 1112,
1133, 1154
F
Star Choice
Star Trak
STS
SuperDish
Teac
Thomson
Toshiba
Uniden
Universum
Video Pall
Zenith
JWC
T
Y
Z
LG
Quasar
Q
R
Gateway
G
Marantz
Mitsubishi
Onkyo
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Radio Shack
T
GE
O
P
Device select : SAT
RCA
Goldstar
U
5005
5012
5005
Satellite Receiver
Hallmark
Hisense
H
R
S
V
Z
Alphastar
Amstrad
Atsky
4027
4046, 4047, 4050
4048
1013, 1015, 1023, 1025,
1045, 1100, 1103, 1110
A
Realistic
5028, 5029, 5030
5007, 5008, 5009, 5016
5012
Runco
Sampo
1010, 1153
1150
1003, 1013, 1024, 1026,
1040, 1045, 1062, 1078,
1083, 1090, 1100, 1105,
1114, 1120, 1121, 1146,
1148, 1157
Hitachi
S
B Sky B
4021, 4045, 4046
4039
4001, 4016, 4044
4030
B
C
D
Toshiba
Yamaha
T
Y
Device select : TV
Chaparral
DIRECTV
DISH Network
Drake
5021, 5022, 5023
Infi nity
Janeil
JBL
I
J
Samsung
Television
4026
Acer
1141
1002, 1009, 1089
1059
1117, 1118
1001
1023
A
Sansui
Sanyo
1119
Device select : DVD
4007, 4017, 4018, 4019,
4020, 4062, 4063, 4064
Admiral
Aiko
Aiwa
Akai
Amtron
Anam
Anam National
AOC
Audiovox
Bell & Howell
Benq
1003, 1025, 1051, 1072,
1077, 1091, 1156, 1157,
1158
1003, 1013, 1014, 1015,
1045, 1055, 1064, 1066,
1076, 1089, 1123
1009
1001, 1102, 1108
1003, 1023, 1038, 1063,
1113
1023
1134
1003, 1039, 1042, 1052,
1053, 1056, 1057, 1063,
1067, 1089, 1151
1023, 1039, 1044
1014
1069
1018
1003, 1018
Echostar
E
JC Penney
Eurosky
Express Vu
Foxtel
4047, 4056
4017
4051
DVD Player
Aiwa
2036, 2037
2012, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2021, 2034
A
Sharp
Jensen
JVC
1003
F
Apex
1028, 1029, 1045, 1047,
1050, 1060, 1065
1001, 1003
1003
1023, 1056, 1057, 1134
1013, 1023, 1033, 1034,
1073, 1099, 1113
1024, 1030
1002, 1009, 1038
1003, 1052, 1053, 1056,
1057, 1063, 1067, 1081,
1106
1003, 1031, 1067, 1122
1003, 1024, 1051, 1115,
1122, 1133
1014, 1069
1003, 1012, 1024, 1043,
1069
1137, 1150
1020, 1096
1017, 1067, 1069, 1095,
1111
Freesat
Fujitsu
GE
4056
4025
4002, 4008, 4009
Signature
Sony
1113
BOSE
Denon
Funai
GE
Harman Kardon
Hitachi
2038, 2039, 2063
2047, 2048
2049
2009, 2020, 2029, 2033
2061
2008, 2012, 2031
B
D
F
G
H
Kawasho
Kenwood
Kloss Novabeam
K
1023, 1069, 1092
1003, 1024, 1049, 1127
1023
1009, 1025
1104, 1142
1003, 1097, 1098, 1113
1001
1003, 1013, 1023, 1026,
1059, 1063
1003, 1043
1113
1023, 1045, 1047
1020, 1022, 1023, 1113
1023, 1067
1003, 1013, 1025, 1026,
1062, 1103, 1110
1003, 1013, 1024, 1035,
1036, 1059, 1084, 1101
1003, 1013, 1016
1103, 1110
1003, 1010, 1153
G
H
Soundesign
General Instruments 4036, 4037
Starlite
Supre-Macy
Gradiente
Hitachi
Hughes
4044, 4057
4001, 4015
4001, 4016
KTV
B
C
LG
M.Wards
L
M
Sylvania
Broksonic
Celebrity
2006, 2010, 2040, 2041,
4049, 4050, 4051, 4052,
4053
JVC
J
K
Humax
2042, 2043
Symphonic
Tandy
Tatung
Technics
Techwood
Kenwood
Koss
2053, 2054
2058
Magnavox
Janeil
4025
J
Citizen
T
JVC
4017
Marantz
Mitsubishi
Motorola
NEC
Colortyme
Contec
Contec/Cony
Craig
Magnavox
Marantz
Marantz (Blu-ray)
Mitsubishi
Onkyo
Oritron
Panasonic
Philips
2007, 2011, 2023, 2025
2025, 2065
2064
2011, 0215
2062
M
Mitsubishi
Nokia
Optima
Panasonic
Philips
Proscan
Radio Shack
RCA
Realistic
Rural Cable
4001
M
N
O
P
4058, 4059, 4060, 4061
4048
4004, 4010
4031, 4035, 4044, 4057
4002, 4008, 4009, 4011
4036, 4037
4002, 4008, 4009, 4029
4040
1003, 1009, 1013, 1023,
1024, 1026, 1038, 1045,
1047, 1059, 1063, 1111,
1113
Teknika
N
Crown
O
P
NET-TV
Orion
2009, 2030
Curtis Mathes
Daewoo
Telecaption
Toshiba
1074
O
P
2003, 2015, 2016, 2055
2007, 2011, 2058
2002, 2014, 2056
2009, 2020, 2032
1003, 1019, 1025, 1026,
1042, 1074, 1098, 1107,
1111, 1135, 1136
1013
1046, 1054
R
D
Panasonic
Daytron
Dimensia
Dumont
Pioneer
Proscan
1003, 1011, 1045, 1052,
1054, 1056, 1057, 1058,
1063, 1067, 1069, 1106
Totevision
Universal
Philips
4036
U
PRESET CODE
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3011, 3014, 3020, 3028,
3053, 3054, 3056, 3057,
3058, 3059
3008, 3060, 3061
3009, 3010, 3010, 3040
3020, 3021, 3062, 3063,
3064
3008
3011, 3014, 3065, 3066,
3067, 3068, 3069
3011, 3014, 3020, 3042,
3054, 3057
3010
Video Concepts
Viewsonic
1113
V
OPTIMUS
1006, 1022, 1109, 1128,
1129, 1130, 1131, 1138,
1143, 1145, 1150
1003, 1009, 1015, 1024,
1038, 1044, 1046, 1052,
1054, 1056, 1057, 1067,
1086, 1103, 1110
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
P
Wards
W
PIONEER
QUASAR
RCA
Q
R
White
Westinghouse
Yamaha
1001, 1101
1003, 1024
1003, 1009, 1010, 1132,
1144, 1153
Y
Z
REALISTIC
Zenith
ROTEL
RS ORIGINAL
SAE
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
3070
3010, 3083
3071
3014, 3068, 3072, 3073
3011, 3018, 3074, 3075,
3076
S
Device select : CD
CD Player
SANYO
SCOTT
AIWA
3001, 3002, 3003
3004, 3005, 3006
3007
A
3014
AKAI
3012, 3014, 3020, 3028,
3042
SEARS
AUDIO
AUDIO LABS
CALIFORNIA
CARVER
CASIO
CURTIS
DENON
EMERSON
3008
3008
3010, 3011, 3009
3012, 3020
3020, 3012
3013
SHARP
3028, 3042, 3077
3042, 3056, 3070, 3078,
3024
C
SHERWOOD
SHURE
3025
3039, 3079, 3080, 3081,
3082, 3097, 3098, 3099,
3100, 3101
3010
3083
3016, 3042, 3057, 3083,
3084, 3085, 3086
3007, 3008, 3061, 3087,
3088
3040
3045
3026
SONY
D
E
F
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
3014
3011, 3015, 3016, 3017,
3018
3019
3014, 3021, 3020
3022, 3023, 3051
3020
3024
3012, 3020, 3025
3026, 3027
FISHER
TEAC
T
GE
G
TECHNICA
GENEXXA
HARMON
HITACHI
INKEL
JC PENNEY
JVC
KARDON
KRELL
LUXMAN
LX I
H
THETA DIGITAL
TOSHIBA
VICTOR
I
J
V
Y
3007, 3089, 3090, 3091,
YAMAHA
ZENITH
3092
3016, 3093, 3094, 3095,
3022, 3051, 3023
3010
Z
K
L
3096
3035, 3036, 3037, 3038
3012, 3020, 3014
3010, 3039, 3040
3010, 3041, 3042, 3043
3012, 3020
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MATHES
MCS
M
3012, 3020
MGA
3023
MISSION
MITSUBISHI
NAD
NAKAMICHI
NEC MCS
NIKKO
3010
3023, 3044
3034, 3045
3046, 3047, 3048
3025
3007, 3016
3049, 3050, 3051, 3052,
3055, 3102, 3103
N
O
ONKYO
PRESET CODE
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimensions / Dimensions / Dimensions
Unit : mm (in)
440.0 (17 3/8)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D&M Holdings Inc.
Printed in China 5411 10549 026M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|